1 #LyX 2.2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
8 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
10 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
11 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
12 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
13 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
14 % the documentation team
15 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
17 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
18 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
20 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
21 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
22 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
23 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
25 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
29 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
30 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
32 % for customized page headers/footers
33 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
35 % change header rule width
36 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
38 % used to have extra space in table cells
39 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
40 {\usepackage{array}}{}
41 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
43 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
44 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
45 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
47 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
49 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
50 \use_default_options false
55 \maintain_unincluded_children false
57 \language_package default
60 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
61 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
62 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
63 \font_math "auto" "auto"
64 \font_default_family default
65 \use_non_tex_fonts false
68 \font_sf_scale 100 100
69 \font_tt_scale 100 100
71 \default_output_format pdf2
73 \bibtex_command bibtex
74 \index_command default
78 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
79 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
83 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
84 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
85 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
90 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
91 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
94 \use_package amsmath 1
95 \use_package amssymb 1
98 \use_package mathdots 1
99 \use_package mathtools 0
100 \use_package mhchem 1
101 \use_package stackrel 0
102 \use_package stmaryrd 0
103 \use_package undertilde 0
105 \cite_engine_type default
109 \paperorientation portrait
113 \notefontcolor #0000ff
130 \paragraph_separation skip
132 \quotes_language english
135 \paperpagestyle default
136 \tracking_changes false
137 \output_changes false
151 by the \SpecialChar LyX
156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
158 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
159 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
160 Documentation mailing list:
161 \begin_inset CommandInset href
163 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
174 \begin_inset Newline newline
178 \begin_inset Newline newline
182 \begin_inset Note Note
185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
186 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
187 \begin_inset Newline newline
192 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
193 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
201 \begin_layout Standard
202 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
203 LatexCommand tableofcontents
210 \begin_layout Chapter
214 \begin_layout Section
215 What is \SpecialChar LyX
219 \begin_layout Standard
221 is a document preparation system.
222 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
223 scripts, publishable books, business
224 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
225 It is unlike most other
226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
233 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
235 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
248 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
251 pt type, left justified, 5
252 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
261 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
265 \begin_layout Standard
266 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
271 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
275 \begin_layout Standard
280 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
281 's philosophy: most importantly,
282 the format of all of the manuals.
283 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
284 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
290 manual describes that, too.
293 \begin_layout Section
298 \begin_layout Standard
299 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
300 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
302 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
303 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
307 \begin_layout Standard
308 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
309 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
310 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
312 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
313 only a vertical scrollbar.
314 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
315 The first case is large images.
316 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
317 image and use the option
328 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
331 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
332 this doesn't work for equations yet.
335 \begin_layout Standard
336 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
337 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
345 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
352 \begin_layout Section
356 \begin_layout Standard
357 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
359 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
361 Just select the manual you want to read from the
368 \begin_layout Section
369 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
371 \begin_inset CommandInset label
373 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
380 \begin_layout Standard
381 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
382 can be configured via the menu
384 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
388 \begin_inset Index idx
391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
398 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
400 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
401 packages are available.
402 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
404 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
406 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
407 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
411 \begin_inset space \space{}
414 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
415 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
417 To force \SpecialChar LyX
418 to re-inspect your system, you should use
420 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
424 \begin_inset Index idx
427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
428 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
434 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
435 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
438 \begin_layout Section
441 \begin_inset CommandInset label
443 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
450 \begin_layout Standard
451 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
452 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
453 installed, but you will not be
454 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
455 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
456 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
457 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
458 document can always be output as plain text
462 \begin_layout Standard
463 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
464 or DocBook classes or packages.
465 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
466 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
469 \begin_layout Standard
470 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
471 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
472 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
475 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
483 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
484 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
487 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
491 \begin_inset Note Note
494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
495 The two braces in the \SpecialChar TeX
496 Code box prevent that the term
497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
505 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
506 More about \SpecialChar TeX
507 Code is described in section
512 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
514 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
518 , the printout of proper names like \SpecialChar LaTeX
519 is explained in section
524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
526 reference "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
536 \begin_inset Index idx
539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
540 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
546 See section 5.1 of the
550 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
554 \begin_layout Chapter
555 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
559 \begin_layout Section
560 Basic File Operations
561 \begin_inset Index idx
564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
573 \begin_layout Standard
578 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
579 in addition to some more advanced operations:
582 \begin_layout Itemize
604 \begin_layout Itemize
620 arg "buffer-new-template"
626 \begin_layout Itemize
648 \begin_layout Itemize
658 \begin_layout Itemize
672 \begin_layout Itemize
694 \begin_layout Itemize
706 arg "buffer-write-as"
712 \begin_layout Itemize
726 \begin_layout Itemize
740 \begin_layout Standard
741 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
742 a few minor differences.
745 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
756 command lists the available templates.
757 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
758 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
759 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
761 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
767 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
774 \begin_layout Standard
775 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
807 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
808 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
809 is just that — a big, blank space.
817 \begin_layout Standard
838 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
843 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
846 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
864 will reload the document from disk.
865 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
866 and want to restore it to the last save.
875 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
876 them as your changes.
879 \begin_layout Section
880 Basic Editing Features
881 \begin_inset Index idx
884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
891 \begin_inset CommandInset label
893 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
900 \begin_layout Standard
901 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
902 can perform cut and paste operations
903 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
904 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
905 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
906 editing features and how to access
908 We will start with cut and paste.
911 \begin_layout Standard
912 As you might expect, the
916 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
917 various other editing features.
918 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
922 \begin_layout Itemize
928 \begin_inset Index idx
931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
960 \begin_layout Itemize
966 \begin_inset Index idx
969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
998 \begin_layout Itemize
1004 \begin_inset Index idx
1007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1032 \begin_layout Itemize
1036 \begin_inset space ~
1042 \begin_layout Itemize
1046 \begin_inset space ~
1052 \begin_layout Itemize
1056 \begin_inset space ~
1060 \begin_inset space ~
1066 \begin_inset Index idx
1069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1078 \begin_inset Index idx
1081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1096 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1106 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1112 \begin_layout Standard
1113 The first three are self-explanatory.
1114 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1115 and other programs by
1136 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1137 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1142 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1143 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1144 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1145 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1146 into individual cells.
1150 \begin_inset space ~
1155 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1156 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1160 \begin_layout Standard
1164 \begin_inset space ~
1169 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1171 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1173 \begin_inset space ~
1180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1186 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1187 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1188 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1190 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1194 \begin_inset space \space{}
1197 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1198 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1201 \begin_inset space ~
1204 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1206 \begin_inset space ~
1210 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1214 \begin_inset space ~
1223 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1224 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1226 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1230 \begin_inset space ~
1235 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1236 start a new paragraph.
1237 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1238 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1243 \begin_inset space ~
1246 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1248 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1252 \begin_inset space ~
1260 \begin_inset space ~
1263 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1266 paste from the primary selection.
1267 This is normally the currently selected text.
1270 \begin_layout Standard
1273 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1275 \begin_inset space ~
1279 \begin_inset space ~
1287 \begin_inset space ~
1291 \begin_inset space ~
1297 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1303 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1306 \begin_inset space ~
1315 \begin_inset space ~
1320 button to skip the current word.
1324 \begin_inset space ~
1329 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1333 \begin_inset space ~
1338 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1340 If the toggle is set, searching for
1341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1352 will not match the word
1353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1367 Match whole words only
1369 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1370 to only find complete words, e.
1371 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1400 offers also an advanced
1403 \begin_inset space ~
1407 \begin_inset space ~
1412 feature that is described in sec.
1413 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1419 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1426 \begin_layout Standard
1427 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1428 \begin_inset space \space{}
1432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1440 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1442 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1447 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1454 \begin_layout Standard
1458 arg "inset-select-all"
1461 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1462 When the cursor is inside an inset
1465 arg "inset-select-all"
1468 selects the content of the inset.
1472 arg "inset-select-all"
1475 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1480 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1483 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1487 \begin_layout Section
1489 \begin_inset Index idx
1492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1499 \begin_inset Index idx
1502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1509 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1511 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1518 \begin_layout Standard
1519 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1521 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1524 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1527 or the toolbar button
1533 to undo some mistake.
1534 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1536 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1539 or the toolbar button
1546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1553 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1554 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1557 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1560 \begin_layout Standard
1561 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1570 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1571 This is a consequence of the 100
1572 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1575 step undo limit mentioned above.
1578 \begin_layout Standard
1587 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1589 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1593 \begin_layout Section
1595 \begin_inset Index idx
1598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1607 \begin_layout Standard
1608 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1611 \begin_layout Enumerate
1616 \begin_layout Itemize
1621 once anywhere in the edit window.
1622 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1626 \begin_layout Enumerate
1631 \begin_layout Itemize
1638 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1641 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1644 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1645 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1648 \begin_layout Itemize
1649 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1652 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1659 \begin_layout Enumerate
1660 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1664 \begin_layout Standard
1665 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1666 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1670 \begin_layout Section
1672 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1674 name "sec:Navigating"
1679 \begin_inset Index idx
1682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1691 \begin_layout Standard
1693 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1696 \begin_layout Itemize
1701 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1702 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1705 \begin_layout Itemize
1706 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1708 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1710 \begin_inset space ~
1715 or by the toolbar button
1718 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1724 \begin_layout Itemize
1725 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1727 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1730 and use the same menu to return to them.
1731 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1734 \begin_layout Standard
1738 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1743 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1744 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1746 \begin_inset space ~
1751 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1752 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1753 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1754 your last editing position.
1757 \begin_layout Standard
1762 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1766 \begin_layout Subsection
1768 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1770 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1777 \begin_layout Standard
1778 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1779 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1780 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1782 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1788 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1792 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1793 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1799 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1804 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1808 \begin_layout Standard
1809 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1810 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1811 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1812 dialog and to modify the citation.
1815 \begin_layout Standard
1816 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1818 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1819 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1827 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1830 \begin_layout Standard
1831 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1832 you further to control the display.
1837 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1838 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1844 option keeps it in the current view state.
1845 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1846 \begin_inset space ~
1849 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1850 \begin_inset space ~
1853 3, the subsections of sections
1854 \begin_inset space ~
1857 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1862 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1863 \begin_inset space ~
1867 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1877 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1880 \begin_layout Standard
1887 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1888 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1902 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1903 So, for example, you can move section
1904 \begin_inset space ~
1908 \begin_inset space ~
1911 2.4 or after section
1912 \begin_inset space ~
1917 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1930 (or the corresponding key bindings
1938 ) you can change the level of sections.
1939 So you can for example make section
1940 \begin_inset space ~
1944 \begin_inset space ~
1948 \begin_inset space ~
1954 \begin_layout Section
1955 Input/Word Completion
1956 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1958 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1963 \begin_inset Index idx
1966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1973 \begin_inset Index idx
1976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2007 \begin_layout Standard
2009 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2011 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2012 is used to propose completions.
2015 \begin_layout Standard
2016 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2019 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2024 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2031 \begin_inset space ~
2035 \begin_inset space ~
2040 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2044 \begin_inset space ~
2049 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2050 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2054 \begin_inset space ~
2060 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2061 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2062 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2063 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2066 \begin_layout Standard
2068 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2069 completions available.
2074 key to accept a proposed completion.
2075 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2076 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2077 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2084 \begin_layout Standard
2085 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2086 ing options for text.
2087 The special math option
2091 enables characters to be composed.
2092 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2093 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2096 , you can then input the characters
2097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2108 to a formula to get it.
2109 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2110 of the math toolbar.
2111 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2115 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2116 's installation folder.
2117 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2126 \begin_layout Section
2128 \begin_inset Index idx
2131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2138 \begin_inset Index idx
2141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2170 \begin_inset Index idx
2173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2204 \begin_layout Standard
2205 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2219 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2222 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2226 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2227 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2233 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2240 \begin_layout Standard
2244 \begin_inset space ~
2252 \begin_inset space ~
2273 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2277 \begin_layout Labeling
2278 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2282 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2283 LatexCommand nomenclature
2285 description "Tabulator key"
2291 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2293 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2294 \begin_inset space ~
2298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2300 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2307 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2311 , especially section
2312 \begin_inset space ~
2316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2318 reference "subsec:Lists"
2324 If you are still confused, look in the
2329 \begin_inset Newline newline
2337 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2338 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2342 \begin_layout Labeling
2343 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2347 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2348 LatexCommand nomenclature
2350 description "Escape key"
2357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2364 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2365 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2368 \begin_layout Labeling
2369 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2375 \begin_inset space ~
2379 \begin_inset space ~
2386 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2387 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2391 \begin_layout Standard
2392 There are three modifier keys:
2395 \begin_layout Labeling
2396 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2414 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2415 LatexCommand nomenclature
2417 description "Control key"
2421 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2422 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2426 \begin_layout Itemize
2435 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2438 \begin_layout Itemize
2447 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2450 \begin_layout Itemize
2459 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2463 \begin_layout Labeling
2464 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2482 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2483 LatexCommand nomenclature
2485 description "Shift key"
2489 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2490 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2493 \begin_layout Labeling
2494 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2512 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2513 LatexCommand nomenclature
2515 description "Alt or Meta key"
2519 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2520 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2521 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2527 \begin_inset Newline newline
2530 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2532 menu accelerator keys
2535 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2536 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2540 \begin_layout Standard
2541 For example, the sequence
2542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2548 \begin_inset space ~
2552 \begin_inset space ~
2558 \begin_inset space ~
2566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2585 \begin_inset space ~
2591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2601 \begin_layout Standard
2606 manual lists all other things bound to the
2614 \begin_layout Standard
2615 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2617 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2618 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2619 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2620 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2621 The \SpecialChar LyX
2622 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2623 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2624 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2626 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2642 followed by a capital
2649 \begin_layout Chapter
2652 \begin_inset Index idx
2655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2665 \begin_layout Section
2667 \begin_inset Index idx
2670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2679 \begin_layout Subsection
2683 \begin_layout Standard
2684 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2685 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2686 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2687 numbering schemes, and so on.
2688 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2689 and format the title of your document differently.
2692 \begin_layout Standard
2697 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2698 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2699 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2700 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2701 picks one for you by default.
2702 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2705 \begin_layout Subsection
2707 \begin_inset Index idx
2710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2717 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2719 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2726 \begin_layout Standard
2727 You can select a class using the
2729 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2730 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2734 \begin_inset Index idx
2737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2744 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2748 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2752 \begin_layout Standard
2753 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2758 \begin_layout Description
2759 Article for basic articles
2762 \begin_layout Description
2763 Report for basic reports
2766 \begin_layout Description
2767 Book for writing a book
2770 \begin_layout Description
2771 Letter for US-style letters
2774 \begin_layout Standard
2775 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2776 only uses if you have installed
2777 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2778 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2779 distributions will include
2781 Here are some of the classes.
2782 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2784 Special Document Classes
2793 \begin_layout Description
2794 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2797 \begin_layout Description
2798 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2802 \begin_layout Description
2803 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2807 \begin_layout Description
2808 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2809 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2810 There are three article layouts available.
2811 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2812 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2813 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2814 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2819 sequential numbering
2820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2823 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2824 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2825 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2826 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2829 \begin_layout Description
2830 Beamer Layout for presentations
2833 \begin_layout Description
2834 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2835 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2836 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2837 with \SpecialChar LyX
2841 \begin_layout Description
2842 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2845 \begin_layout Description
2847 \begin_inset space ~
2850 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2853 \begin_layout Description
2854 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2857 \begin_layout Description
2858 Foils Used to make transparencies
2861 \begin_layout Description
2862 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2863 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2864 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2865 with \SpecialChar LyX
2869 \begin_layout Description
2870 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2871 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2874 \begin_layout Description
2875 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2878 \begin_layout Description
2879 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2882 \begin_layout Description
2883 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2884 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2885 (Is used by this document.)
2888 \begin_layout Description
2889 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2892 \begin_layout Description
2893 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2896 \begin_layout Description
2901 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2902 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2904 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
2908 \begin_layout Description
2909 Slides Used to make transparencies
2912 \begin_layout Description
2914 \begin_inset space ~
2917 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2918 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2921 \begin_layout Description
2922 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2925 \begin_layout Standard
2926 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2928 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2934 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2935 of the document classes.
2938 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2942 \begin_layout Standard
2943 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2945 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2946 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2948 \begin_inset Index idx
2951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2968 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2969 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2971 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2974 \begin_layout Standard
2977 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
2982 , are highly specialized.
2984 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
2985 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
2986 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
2987 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2988 by some document class.
2989 There are just too many of them.
2990 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2993 \begin_layout Standard
2994 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
2995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3002 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3003 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3004 document class for a new file.
3006 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3011 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3020 manual for information on how to install them.
3021 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3027 \begin_layout Standard
3028 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3029 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3030 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3031 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3032 class files to be used for dissertation
3033 s submitted to those universities.
3034 The \SpecialChar LyX
3035 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3037 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3041 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3047 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3050 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3052 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3054 name "subsec:Modules"
3059 \begin_inset Index idx
3062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3071 \begin_layout Standard
3072 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3073 chosen document class.
3074 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3075 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3082 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3086 \begin_inset Index idx
3089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3096 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3100 \begin_layout Standard
3101 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3102 packages or file format converters that are not always
3103 installed by default.
3105 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3106 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3107 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3108 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3110 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3111 file without the missing prerequisites.
3112 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3113 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3116 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3120 \begin_inset Index idx
3123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3124 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3134 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3143 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3146 \begin_layout Standard
3147 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3155 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3157 will advise you about these things.
3165 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3167 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3169 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3174 \begin_inset Index idx
3177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3178 Document ! Local Layout
3186 \begin_layout Standard
3187 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3188 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3189 : They are intended to be used in
3190 a variety of different documents.
3191 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3192 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3193 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3194 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3195 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3197 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3215 manual for information on how to use it.
3218 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3222 \begin_layout Standard
3223 Each class has a default set of options.
3224 Here's a quick table describing them:
3227 \begin_layout Standard
3228 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3234 \begin_layout Standard
3236 \begin_inset Tabular
3237 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3238 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3239 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3240 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3241 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3242 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3243 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3697 \begin_layout Standard
3698 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3704 \begin_layout Standard
3705 You're probably also wondering what
3706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3710 \begin_inset space ~
3714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3718 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3719 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3724 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3729 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3739 headings, there are also
3747 headings, and so on.
3748 We will describe these headings fully in section
3749 \begin_inset space ~
3753 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3755 reference "subsec:Headings"
3762 \begin_layout Subsection
3764 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3766 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3771 \begin_inset Index idx
3774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3781 \begin_inset Index idx
3784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3793 \begin_layout Standard
3794 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3796 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3803 \begin_inset space ~
3811 \begin_inset space ~
3816 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3818 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3819 doesn't support special options you want to
3820 use for your document.
3821 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3822 -class and its options, you have to read
3826 \begin_layout Standard
3830 \begin_inset space ~
3837 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3843 \begin_inset space ~
3848 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3849 You can choose between the following five options:
3852 \begin_layout Labeling
3853 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3858 Use default page style of current class.
3861 \begin_layout Labeling
3862 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3867 No page numbers or headings.
3870 \begin_layout Labeling
3871 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3879 \begin_layout Labeling
3880 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3885 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3886 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
3887 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
3888 maximum sectioning level of the class.
3891 \begin_layout Labeling
3892 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3897 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3898 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3904 \begin_inset Index idx
3907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3909 -packages ! fancyhdr
3915 How they are defined is explained in section
3916 \begin_inset space ~
3920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3922 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3929 \begin_layout Standard
3930 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3931 \begin_inset space ~
3935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3937 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
3944 \begin_layout Subsection
3945 Paper Size and Orientation
3946 \begin_inset Index idx
3949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3950 Document ! Paper size
3956 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3958 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3965 \begin_layout Standard
3966 You can find the following options in the menu
3969 \begin_inset space ~
3976 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3980 \begin_inset Index idx
3983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3992 \begin_layout Labeling
3993 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3997 \begin_inset space ~
4002 What size paper to print on.
4007 \begin_layout Itemize
4013 \begin_layout Itemize
4019 \begin_layout Itemize
4025 \begin_layout Itemize
4031 \begin_layout Itemize
4034 US letter, US legal, US executive
4037 \begin_layout Itemize
4043 \begin_layout Itemize
4050 \begin_layout Labeling
4051 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4056 To choose whether to output as
4067 \begin_layout Labeling
4068 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4072 \begin_inset space ~
4077 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4078 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4081 \begin_layout Subsection
4083 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4085 name "subsec:Margins"
4090 \begin_inset Index idx
4093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4100 \begin_inset Index idx
4103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4112 \begin_layout Standard
4113 Paper margins are set in the menu
4115 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4119 \begin_inset Index idx
4122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4131 \begin_layout Standard
4132 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4133 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4134 the paper format and the font size into account.
4137 \begin_layout Subsection
4141 \begin_layout Standard
4142 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4148 That includes the paragraph environments.
4149 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4150 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4151 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4153 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4162 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4164 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4165 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4166 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4169 \begin_layout Section
4170 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4171 \begin_inset Index idx
4174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4175 Paragraph ! Indentation
4183 \begin_layout Subsection
4185 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4187 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4194 \begin_layout Standard
4195 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4196 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4199 \begin_layout Standard
4200 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4201 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4202 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4203 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4207 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4213 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4214 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4215 language than English.
4217 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4220 \begin_layout Standard
4221 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4222 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4223 into \SpecialChar LyX
4225 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4228 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4230 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4231 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4232 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4239 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4240 goes to produce a printable file.
4245 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4247 gives you the ability globally to change
4251 these pre-coded spacings.
4252 We will explain more later.
4255 \begin_layout Subsection
4256 Paragraph Separation
4257 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4259 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4264 \begin_inset Index idx
4267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4268 Paragraph ! Separation
4276 \begin_layout Standard
4284 \begin_inset space ~
4292 \begin_inset space ~
4299 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4303 \begin_inset Index idx
4306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4312 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4315 \begin_layout Subsection
4319 \begin_layout Standard
4320 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4323 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4325 \begin_inset space ~
4330 dialog and toggle the
4333 \begin_inset space ~
4338 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4341 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4345 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4346 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4350 \begin_layout Standard
4351 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4352 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4355 \begin_layout Subsection
4357 \begin_inset Index idx
4360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4361 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4369 \begin_layout Standard
4372 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4376 \begin_inset Index idx
4379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4388 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4392 \begin_inset space ~
4401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4402 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4408 \begin_inset Index idx
4411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4413 -packages ! setspace
4418 installed to use this feature.
4423 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4425 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4427 \begin_inset space ~
4432 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4433 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4436 \begin_layout Section
4437 Paragraph Environments
4438 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4440 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4445 \begin_inset Index idx
4448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4449 Paragraph ! Environments
4455 \begin_inset Index idx
4458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4459 Paragraph environments|(
4467 \begin_layout Subsection
4471 \begin_layout Standard
4472 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4475 \begin_layout Standard
4494 \begin_inset Newline newline
4497 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4499 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4500 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4501 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4510 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4513 \begin_layout Standard
4514 A paragraph environment is simply a
4515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4522 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4523 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4524 scheme, labels, and so on.
4525 Additionally, you can
4526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4533 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4534 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4535 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4536 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4538 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4540 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4543 \begin_layout Standard
4544 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4545 \begin_inset Graphics
4546 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4552 at the left end of the toolbar.
4554 will change the environment of the
4558 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4559 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4560 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4564 \begin_layout Standard
4573 create a new paragraph using the
4577 paragraph environment.
4579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4586 because if you are in one of these environments:
4589 \begin_layout Itemize
4595 \begin_layout Itemize
4601 \begin_layout Itemize
4607 \begin_layout Itemize
4613 \begin_layout Itemize
4619 \begin_layout Itemize
4625 \begin_layout Itemize
4631 \begin_layout Standard
4633 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4637 , rather than resetting it to
4642 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4643 \begin_inset space ~
4647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4649 reference "sec:Nesting"
4656 \begin_layout Subsection
4660 \begin_layout Standard
4661 The default paragraph environment is
4666 It creates a plain paragraph.
4668 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4669 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4670 this manual) are in the
4677 \begin_layout Standard
4678 You can nest a paragraph using the
4682 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4690 \begin_layout Subsection
4692 \begin_inset Index idx
4695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4704 \begin_layout Standard
4705 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4706 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4715 for thanks or contact information.
4716 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4717 places all of this on a separate page
4718 along with today's date.
4719 For other types of documents, the title
4720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4727 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4731 \begin_layout Standard
4733 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4747 Here's how you use them:
4750 \begin_layout Itemize
4751 Put the title of your document in the
4758 \begin_layout Itemize
4759 Put the author name in the
4766 \begin_layout Itemize
4767 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4768 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4774 Note that using this environment is optional.
4775 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4776 will automatically insert today's date.
4777 If you don't want a date, use the option
4779 Suppress default date on front page
4783 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4784 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4786 \begin_inset space ~
4794 \begin_layout Standard
4795 You can use footnotes to insert
4796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4803 or contact information.
4806 \begin_layout Subsection
4808 \begin_inset Index idx
4811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4818 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4820 name "subsec:Headings"
4827 \begin_layout Standard
4828 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4830 takes care of the numbering for you.
4833 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4835 \begin_inset Index idx
4838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4839 Section headings ! Numbered
4847 \begin_layout Standard
4848 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4852 \begin_layout Enumerate
4858 \begin_layout Enumerate
4864 \begin_layout Enumerate
4870 \begin_layout Enumerate
4876 \begin_layout Enumerate
4882 \begin_layout Enumerate
4888 \begin_layout Enumerate
4894 \begin_layout Standard
4896 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4897 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4898 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4901 \begin_layout Standard
4902 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4903 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4904 You group the book into chapters.
4906 does a similar grouping:
4909 \begin_layout Itemize
4914 is divided into either
4925 \begin_layout Itemize
4937 \begin_layout Itemize
4949 \begin_layout Itemize
4961 \begin_layout Itemize
4973 \begin_layout Itemize
4985 \begin_layout Standard
4986 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4994 Not all document types use the
4998 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5003 is the top-level heading.
5011 \begin_layout Standard
5016 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5017 labels it with its number,
5018 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5020 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5032 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5034 \begin_inset Index idx
5037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5038 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5046 \begin_layout Standard
5047 The unnumbered section headings have a
5048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5055 at the end of their name.
5056 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5057 the table of contents, see section
5058 \begin_inset space ~
5062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5071 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5072 Changing the Numbering
5073 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5075 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5082 \begin_layout Standard
5083 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5084 in the Table of Contents.
5085 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5087 Just as certain classes start with
5101 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5111 This is something you can change.
5114 \begin_layout Standard
5117 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5121 \begin_inset Index idx
5124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5133 \begin_inset space ~
5137 \begin_inset space ~
5142 you will see two counters.
5147 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5148 numbers a section heading.
5149 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5153 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5154 Short Titles of Headings
5155 \begin_inset Index idx
5158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5159 Section headings ! Short titles
5165 \begin_inset Argument 1
5168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5175 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5177 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5184 \begin_layout Standard
5185 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5186 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5187 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5188 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5191 \begin_layout Standard
5193 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5194 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5195 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5196 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5199 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5201 \begin_inset space ~
5207 This will insert a box labeled
5208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5212 \begin_inset space ~
5216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5219 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5220 This also works for captions inside floats.
5221 There can only be one short title per title.
5224 \begin_layout Standard
5225 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5228 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5232 \begin_layout Standard
5233 The following information applies to all section headings:
5236 \begin_layout Itemize
5237 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5240 \begin_layout Itemize
5241 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5244 \begin_layout Itemize
5245 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5248 \begin_layout Itemize
5249 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5252 \begin_layout Subsection
5256 \begin_layout Standard
5258 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5272 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5273 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5274 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5275 the text they contain.
5276 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5284 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5287 \begin_layout Standard
5288 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5297 when you start a new paragraph.
5298 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5302 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5303 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5304 have to change back to the
5308 environment yourself.
5311 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5313 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5320 \begin_inset Index idx
5323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5332 \begin_layout Standard
5333 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5334 time for the differences.
5343 are identical except for one difference:
5347 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5356 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5359 \begin_layout Standard
5360 Here's an example of the
5373 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5375 See – no indentation!
5379 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5380 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5381 the other paragraph.
5384 \begin_layout Standard
5385 Here's another example, this time in the
5392 \begin_layout Quotation
5398 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5399 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5400 the first line, then
5404 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5408 you were quoting other text.
5411 \begin_layout Quotation
5412 Here's a new paragraph.
5413 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5414 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5417 \begin_layout Standard
5418 As the examples show,
5422 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5423 They should put quotes in the
5428 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5432 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5435 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5437 \begin_inset Index idx
5440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5447 \begin_inset Index idx
5450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5457 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5466 \begin_layout Standard
5471 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5477 \begin_inset Newline newline
5480 Which I did not rehearse!
5484 It could be much worse.
5485 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5487 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5488 indented a bit more than the first.
5489 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5495 \begin_inset Newline newline
5498 And make things look fine
5499 \begin_inset Newline newline
5505 arg "newline-insert newline"
5511 \begin_layout Standard
5516 does not indent both margins.
5517 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5518 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5521 arg "newline-insert newline"
5527 \begin_layout Subsection
5529 \begin_inset Index idx
5532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5539 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5548 \begin_layout Standard
5550 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5560 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5561 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5570 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5571 lets you provide your own label.
5572 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5573 describing some general features of all four of them.
5576 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5580 \begin_layout Standard
5581 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5583 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5584 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5593 reset the environment to
5597 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5598 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5599 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5603 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5607 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5614 \begin_layout Standard
5615 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5616 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5617 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5619 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5620 you read all of section
5621 \begin_inset space ~
5625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5627 reference "sec:Nesting"
5634 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5636 \begin_inset Index idx
5639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5646 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5655 \begin_layout Standard
5656 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5660 paragraph environment.
5661 It has the following properties:
5664 \begin_layout Itemize
5665 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5669 \begin_layout Itemize
5671 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5674 \begin_layout Itemize
5675 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5679 \begin_layout Itemize
5680 The items can have any length.
5682 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5683 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5690 \begin_layout Itemize
5695 environment inside another
5699 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5703 \begin_layout Itemize
5704 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5707 \begin_layout Itemize
5709 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5712 \begin_layout Itemize
5714 \begin_inset space ~
5718 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5720 reference "sec:Nesting"
5724 for a full explanation of nesting.
5728 \begin_layout Standard
5729 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5738 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5741 \begin_layout Standard
5742 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5743 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5746 \begin_layout Itemize
5747 The label for the first level
5751 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5755 \begin_layout Itemize
5756 The label for the second level is a dash.
5760 \begin_layout Itemize
5761 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5765 \begin_layout Itemize
5766 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5770 \begin_layout Itemize
5771 Back out to the third level.
5775 \begin_layout Itemize
5776 Back to the second level.
5780 \begin_layout Itemize
5781 Back to the outermost level.
5784 \begin_layout Standard
5785 These are the default labels for an
5790 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5792 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5795 dialog in the submenu
5800 \begin_inset Index idx
5803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5809 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5813 \begin_layout Standard
5814 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5815 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5817 \begin_inset space ~
5821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5823 reference "sec:Nesting"
5830 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5832 \begin_inset Index idx
5835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5842 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5844 name "sec:Enumerate"
5851 \begin_layout Standard
5856 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5857 It has these properties:
5860 \begin_layout Enumerate
5861 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5865 \begin_layout Enumerate
5866 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5870 \begin_layout Enumerate
5872 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5875 \begin_layout Enumerate
5880 environment resets the counter to one.
5883 \begin_layout Enumerate
5896 \begin_layout Enumerate
5897 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5898 Items can have any length.
5901 \begin_layout Enumerate
5902 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5905 \begin_layout Enumerate
5906 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5909 \begin_layout Enumerate
5910 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5914 \begin_layout Standard
5923 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
5925 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
5926 labels the four different levels in an
5933 \begin_layout Enumerate
5934 The first level of an
5938 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5942 \begin_layout Enumerate
5943 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5947 \begin_layout Enumerate
5948 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5952 \begin_layout Enumerate
5953 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5956 \begin_layout Enumerate
5957 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5962 \begin_layout Enumerate
5963 Back to the third level
5967 \begin_layout Enumerate
5968 Back to the second level.
5972 \begin_layout Enumerate
5973 Back to the outermost level.
5976 \begin_layout Standard
5977 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5981 environment, see section
5982 \begin_inset space ~
5986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5988 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
5993 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
5997 \begin_layout Standard
5998 There is more to nesting
6002 environments than we've stated here.
6003 You should read section
6004 \begin_inset space ~
6008 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6010 reference "sec:Nesting"
6014 to learn more about nesting.
6017 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6019 \begin_inset Index idx
6022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6031 \begin_layout Standard
6032 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6036 list has no fixed label.
6037 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6046 of the first line as the label.
6050 \begin_layout Description
6051 Example: This is an example of the
6058 \begin_layout Standard
6060 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6064 \begin_layout Standard
6066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6073 it is meant that the first usage of the
6077 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6079 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6087 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6092 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6093 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6095 \begin_inset space ~
6101 \begin_inset space ~
6105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6107 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6111 for more information.) Here is an example:
6114 \begin_layout Description
6116 \begin_inset space ~
6119 Example: This one shows how to use a
6122 \begin_inset space ~
6134 \begin_layout Description
6135 Usage: You should use the
6139 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6140 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6142 It's not a good idea to use a
6146 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6147 You're better off using
6159 paragraphs into them.
6162 \begin_layout Description
6163 Nesting: You can nest
6167 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6171 \begin_layout Standard
6172 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6173 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6174 them from the first line.
6177 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6179 \begin_inset Index idx
6182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6191 \begin_layout Standard
6196 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6197 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6201 \begin_layout Standard
6210 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6212 Here are its properties:
6215 \begin_layout Labeling
6216 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6218 \begin_inset space ~
6221 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6230 of each line as the item label.
6235 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6236 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6237 space as described above.
6240 \begin_layout Labeling
6241 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6242 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6243 uses different margins for the item label and the
6244 body of the item text.
6245 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6246 label width plus a little extra space.
6250 \begin_layout Labeling
6251 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6253 \begin_inset space ~
6256 width \SpecialChar LyX
6257 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6258 If the label width is larger, the label
6259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6266 into the first line.
6267 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6268 margin of the rest of the item text.
6271 \begin_layout Labeling
6272 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6274 \begin_inset space ~
6277 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6282 environment has the same left margin.
6283 \begin_inset Newline newline
6286 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6289 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6291 \begin_inset space ~
6296 dialog (toolbar button
6299 arg "layout-paragraph"
6306 \begin_inset space ~
6311 determines the default label width.
6312 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6321 multiple times instead.
6322 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6332 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6335 \begin_inset space ~
6340 every time you alter a label in a
6345 \begin_inset Newline newline
6348 The predefined default width is the length of
6349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6357 \begin_inset space ~
6363 \begin_layout Standard
6368 list the same way as the
6372 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6378 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6382 \begin_layout Standard
6387 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6388 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6390 \begin_inset space ~
6394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6396 reference "sec:Nesting"
6400 to learn about nesting.
6403 \begin_layout Standard
6404 There is yet another feature of the
6408 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6409 left-justifies the item labels by
6411 You can use additional
6415 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6416 justifies the item label.
6421 are documented in section
6422 \begin_inset space ~
6426 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6428 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6433 Here are some examples:
6436 \begin_layout Labeling
6437 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6438 Left The default for
6445 \begin_layout Labeling
6446 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6447 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6454 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6457 \begin_layout Labeling
6458 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6459 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6463 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6470 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6473 \begin_layout Subsection
6475 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6477 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6482 \begin_inset Index idx
6485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6494 \begin_layout Standard
6495 The features described in this section require that the module
6497 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6499 is loaded in the document settings.
6500 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6506 \begin_inset Index idx
6509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6511 -packages ! enumitem
6519 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6520 Custom Enumerate Lists
6521 \begin_inset Index idx
6524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6525 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6533 \begin_layout Standard
6535 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6538 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6541 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6542 There you add the command
6545 \begin_layout Standard
6553 \begin_layout Standard
6565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6566 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6567 Code, look at section
6568 \begin_inset space ~
6572 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6574 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6587 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6594 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6595 For capital Roman numerals replace
6607 in the command above.
6608 For Arabic numerals use
6616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6623 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6638 \begin_layout Standard
6640 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6648 You can only number 26
6649 \begin_inset space ~
6652 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6660 \begin_layout Standard
6661 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6662 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6665 \begin_layout Standard
6666 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6669 \begin_layout Enumerate
6670 \begin_inset Argument 1
6673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6699 \begin_layout Enumerate
6700 \begin_inset Argument 1
6703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6726 \begin_layout Enumerate
6731 \begin_layout Enumerate
6732 \begin_inset Argument 1
6735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6759 \begin_layout Enumerate
6760 \begin_inset Argument 1
6763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6789 \begin_layout Standard
6790 For this list these commands were used:
6793 \begin_layout Standard
6804 \begin_inset Newline newline
6812 \begin_inset Newline newline
6820 \begin_inset Newline newline
6830 \begin_layout Standard
6837 makes the label emphasized and
6846 \begin_layout Standard
6847 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6855 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6856 lists until you change the definition.
6864 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6866 \begin_inset Index idx
6869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6870 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6878 \begin_layout Standard
6879 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6882 \begin_layout Enumerate
6883 \begin_inset Argument 1
6886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6905 \begin_inset Note Note
6908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6909 goes back to default numbering
6917 \begin_layout Enumerate
6921 \begin_layout Standard
6925 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6929 \begin_layout Standard
6930 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6935 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
6936 to indicate that it is a resumed
6937 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
6938 , but in the output.
6941 \begin_layout Standard
6942 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6950 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
6959 \begin_layout Standard
6960 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6962 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6963 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6964 of a normal enumeration.
6965 There, insert the command
6968 \begin_layout Standard
6974 \begin_layout Standard
6979 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6983 \begin_layout Enumerate
6987 \begin_layout Enumerate
6991 \begin_layout Standard
6992 Enumeration starting at a given value:
6995 \begin_layout Enumerate
6996 \begin_inset Argument 1
6999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7015 This enumeration starts at 4
7018 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7020 \begin_inset Index idx
7023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7032 \begin_layout Standard
7033 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7035 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7038 \begin_layout Itemize
7042 \begin_layout Itemize
7043 with standard spacing
7046 \begin_layout Standard
7047 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7049 Add there the command
7053 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7056 \begin_layout Itemize
7057 \begin_inset Argument 1
7060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7079 \begin_layout Itemize
7083 \begin_layout Itemize
7087 \begin_layout Standard
7088 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7095 \begin_inset Index idx
7098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7100 -packages ! enumitem
7106 For more information see its documentation,
7107 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7116 \begin_layout Standard
7117 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7119 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7120 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7121 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7124 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7127 \begin_layout Enumerate
7128 \begin_inset Argument 1
7131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7139 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7152 \begin_layout Enumerate
7153 with negative indentation
7156 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7157 Further Customization
7158 \begin_inset Index idx
7161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7162 Lists ! Customization
7170 \begin_layout Standard
7171 You can also change the style of description lists.
7175 \begin_layout Standard
7181 \begin_layout Standard
7182 changes the description label font, the command
7185 \begin_layout Standard
7191 \begin_layout Standard
7192 sets the list style.
7195 \begin_layout Standard
7196 An example where the command
7199 \begin_layout Standard
7204 itshape, style=nextline
7207 \begin_layout Standard
7211 \begin_layout Description
7213 \begin_inset space ~
7217 \begin_inset Argument 1
7220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7226 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7228 itshape, style=nextline
7238 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7239 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7243 \begin_layout Description
7245 \begin_inset space ~
7248 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7249 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7250 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7253 \begin_layout Standard
7254 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7260 \begin_inset Index idx
7263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7265 -packages ! enumitem
7271 For more information see its documentation
7272 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7281 \begin_layout Subsection
7283 \begin_inset Index idx
7286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7295 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7297 \begin_inset space ~
7300 Address: An Overview
7303 \begin_layout Standard
7304 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7305 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7313 \begin_inset space ~
7319 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7320 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7321 gags on the document.
7322 In contrast, you can use the
7329 \begin_inset space ~
7334 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7335 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7340 Of course, you're not limited to using
7347 \begin_inset space ~
7356 \begin_inset space ~
7361 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7362 some European academic papers.
7365 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7367 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7369 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7376 \begin_layout Standard
7381 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7382 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7386 \begin_inset space ~
7391 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7392 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7393 Here's an example of each:
7396 \begin_layout Right Address
7398 \begin_inset Newline newline
7402 \begin_inset Newline newline
7406 \begin_inset Newline newline
7409 When is it? What is today?
7412 \begin_layout Standard
7416 \begin_inset space ~
7422 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7424 the largest block of text on a single line.
7425 Here's an example of the
7432 \begin_layout Address
7434 \begin_inset Newline newline
7437 Where do I send this
7438 \begin_inset Newline newline
7441 Your post office and country
7444 \begin_layout Standard
7445 As you can see, both
7452 \begin_inset space ~
7457 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7462 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7463 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7469 This makes sense, since
7477 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7478 Thus, you have to use
7485 arg "newline-insert newline"
7490 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7491 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7493 \begin_inset space ~
7497 \begin_inset space ~
7502 ) to start a new line in an
7509 \begin_inset space ~
7517 \begin_layout Subsection
7521 \begin_layout Standard
7522 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7523 or list of references.
7525 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7528 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7530 \begin_inset Index idx
7533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7542 \begin_layout Standard
7547 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7548 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7549 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7550 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7564 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7565 The book document classes ignores the
7569 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7573 in a letter document class.
7576 \begin_layout Standard
7581 environment does several things for you.
7582 First, it puts the centered label
7583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7591 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7593 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7594 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7595 the subsequent text.
7596 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7598 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7602 \begin_layout Standard
7603 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7607 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7608 The new paragraph will still be in the
7613 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7614 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7617 \begin_layout Standard
7618 \begin_inset Float figure
7623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7625 \begin_inset Graphics
7626 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7634 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7637 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7639 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7660 \begin_layout Standard
7661 We would love to demonstrate the
7665 environment, but since this document is in the
7666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7673 class, we can't do this.
7674 We inserted it therefore as figure
7675 \begin_inset space ~
7679 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7681 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7686 If you have never heard of an
7687 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7694 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7697 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7699 \begin_inset Index idx
7702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7709 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7711 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7718 \begin_layout Standard
7723 environment is used to list references.
7724 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7725 only use it at the end of the document.
7737 \begin_layout Standard
7738 When you first open a
7742 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7743 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7759 depending on the document class.
7760 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7761 Each paragraph of the
7765 environment is a bibliography entry.
7770 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7771 Each new paragraph is still in the
7778 \begin_layout Standard
7779 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7780 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7782 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7784 handling, have a look at section
7785 \begin_inset space ~
7789 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7791 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7798 \begin_layout Subsection
7799 Special Environments
7802 \begin_layout Standard
7804 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7805 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7808 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7813 \begin_inset Index idx
7816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7824 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7826 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7833 \begin_layout Standard
7839 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7841 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7846 key as a fixed whitespace.
7850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7863 \begin_inset space ~
7868 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7886 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
7889 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7892 arg "newline-insert newline"
7909 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7910 So, when you finish using the
7915 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7916 Also, you can nest the
7921 environment inside of others.
7924 \begin_layout Standard
7925 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7928 \begin_layout Itemize
7932 arg "newline-insert newline"
7935 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7936 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7940 \begin_inset space \space{}
7950 arg "newline-insert newline"
7956 \begin_layout Itemize
7960 arg "newline-insert newline"
7970 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7976 \begin_layout Itemize
7977 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7978 You must put at least one
7982 in any line you want blank.
7983 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
7987 \begin_layout Itemize
7988 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7992 since that will insert
7997 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8000 arg "self-insert \""
8006 \begin_layout Standard
8010 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8014 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8018 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8022 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8026 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8027 printf("Hello World!
8032 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8036 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8040 \begin_layout Standard
8041 This is just the standard
8042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8053 \begin_layout Standard
8059 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8061 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8062 as if you used a typewriter.
8063 \begin_inset Index idx
8066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8067 Paragraph environments|)
8072 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8075 Program Code Listings
8080 \begin_inset space ~
8088 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8092 \begin_inset Index idx
8095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8104 \begin_layout Standard
8109 environment is similar to the
8114 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8115 computer console text.
8120 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8134 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8135 you can have empty lines.
8148 \begin_layout Itemize
8149 have a certain language and a text style
8152 \begin_layout Itemize
8153 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8154 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8155 and \SpecialChar TeX
8159 \begin_layout Standard
8160 Because of these properties
8164 works like a typewriter.
8168 \begin_layout Verbatim
8172 \begin_layout Verbatim
8175 The following 2 lines are empty:
8178 \begin_layout Verbatim
8182 \begin_layout Verbatim
8186 \begin_layout Verbatim
8187 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8192 \begin_layout Standard
8197 environment is identical to
8201 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8202 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8209 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8213 \begin_layout Section
8214 Nesting Environments
8215 \begin_inset Index idx
8218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8219 Nesting ! Environments
8225 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8234 \begin_layout Subsection
8238 \begin_layout Standard
8240 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8242 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8244 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8246 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8258 \begin_layout Enumerate
8262 \begin_layout Enumerate
8267 \begin_layout Enumerate
8271 \begin_layout Enumerate
8276 \begin_layout Enumerate
8280 \begin_layout Standard
8281 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8282 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8284 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8286 \begin_inset space ~
8290 \begin_inset space ~
8298 \begin_inset space ~
8302 \begin_inset space ~
8307 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8309 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8312 arg "depth-increment"
8318 arg "depth-decrement"
8332 arg "depth-increment"
8338 arg "depth-decrement"
8342 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8343 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8347 \begin_layout Standard
8348 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8349 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8350 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8351 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8352 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8355 \begin_layout Standard
8356 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8358 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8360 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8363 \begin_layout Subsection
8364 What You Can and Can't Nest
8367 \begin_layout Standard
8368 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8369 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8372 \begin_layout Standard
8373 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8374 than a simple yes or no.
8375 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8378 \begin_layout Itemize
8379 Completely unnestable
8382 \begin_layout Itemize
8383 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8387 \begin_layout Itemize
8388 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8392 \begin_layout Standard
8393 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8394 environments have them:
8397 \begin_layout Description
8398 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8399 Can't nest into them.
8403 \begin_layout Itemize
8409 \begin_layout Itemize
8415 \begin_layout Itemize
8421 \begin_layout Itemize
8427 \begin_layout Itemize
8434 \begin_layout Description
8436 \begin_inset space ~
8439 Nestable You can nest them.
8440 You can nest other things into them.
8444 \begin_layout Itemize
8450 \begin_layout Itemize
8456 \begin_layout Itemize
8462 \begin_layout Itemize
8468 \begin_layout Itemize
8474 \begin_layout Itemize
8480 \begin_layout Itemize
8486 \begin_layout Itemize
8493 \begin_layout Itemize
8499 \begin_layout Itemize
8506 \begin_layout Description
8507 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8508 You can't nest anything into them.
8512 \begin_layout Itemize
8518 \begin_layout Itemize
8524 \begin_layout Itemize
8530 \begin_layout Itemize
8536 \begin_layout Itemize
8542 \begin_layout Itemize
8548 \begin_layout Itemize
8554 \begin_layout Itemize
8560 \begin_layout Itemize
8566 \begin_layout Itemize
8572 \begin_layout Itemize
8578 \begin_layout Itemize
8584 \begin_layout Itemize
8590 \begin_layout Itemize
8594 \begin_inset space ~
8600 \begin_layout Itemize
8607 \begin_layout Standard
8608 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8616 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8626 \begin_inset space ~
8629 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8630 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8631 nested section headings violate this.
8639 \begin_layout Subsection
8640 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8641 \begin_inset Index idx
8644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8645 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8653 \begin_layout Standard
8654 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8655 affected by nesting anyhow.
8659 \begin_layout Itemize
8663 \begin_layout Itemize
8667 \begin_layout Itemize
8671 \begin_layout Standard
8673 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8681 Figures and tables in
8685 are not affected by this.
8690 Have a look at section
8691 \begin_inset space ~
8695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8697 reference "sec:Floats"
8701 for more information about
8708 \begin_layout Standard
8710 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8711 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8715 \begin_layout Standard
8716 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8724 of its own, it behaves just like a
8725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8732 paragraph environment.
8733 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8737 \begin_layout Standard
8738 Here's an example with a table:
8741 \begin_layout Enumerate
8746 \begin_layout Enumerate
8747 This is (a) and it's nested.
8751 \begin_layout Standard
8752 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8758 \begin_layout Standard
8760 \begin_inset Tabular
8761 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8762 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8763 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8764 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8848 \begin_layout Standard
8849 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8856 \begin_layout Enumerate
8858 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8862 \begin_layout Enumerate
8866 \begin_layout Standard
8867 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8870 \begin_layout Enumerate
8875 \begin_layout Enumerate
8876 This is (a) and it's nested.
8880 \begin_layout Standard
8881 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8887 \begin_layout Standard
8889 \begin_inset Tabular
8890 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8891 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8892 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8893 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8977 \begin_layout Standard
8978 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8984 \begin_layout Enumerate
8991 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8994 \begin_layout Enumerate
8998 \begin_layout Standard
8999 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9003 \begin_layout Standard
9004 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9007 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9010 \begin_layout Enumerate
9015 \begin_layout Enumerate
9016 This is (a) and it's nested.
9019 \begin_layout Standard
9020 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9026 \begin_layout Standard
9028 \begin_inset Tabular
9029 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9030 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9031 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9032 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9117 \begin_layout Standard
9118 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9124 \begin_layout Enumerate
9126 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9133 \begin_layout Enumerate
9137 \begin_layout Standard
9138 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9144 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9145 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9149 \begin_layout Subsection
9150 Usage and General Features
9153 \begin_layout Standard
9154 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9155 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9164 is the innermost possible depth.
9165 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9168 \begin_layout Enumerate
9169 level #1 – outermost
9173 \begin_layout Enumerate
9178 \begin_layout Enumerate
9183 \begin_layout Enumerate
9188 \begin_layout Itemize
9193 \begin_layout Itemize
9202 \begin_layout Standard
9203 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9204 both of them in the example.
9205 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9215 For example, if we tried to nest another
9220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9227 , we would get errors.
9230 \begin_layout Subsection
9232 \begin_inset Index idx
9235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9244 \begin_layout Standard
9245 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9246 We have several examples of nested environments.
9247 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9251 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9252 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9255 \begin_layout Labeling
9256 \labelwidthstring MMM
9257 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9266 \begin_layout Labeling
9267 \labelwidthstring MMM
9268 #2-a This is level #2.
9269 We created it by using
9272 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9278 arg "depth-increment"
9285 \begin_layout Labeling
9286 \labelwidthstring MMM
9287 #3-a This is level #3.
9288 This time, we just enter
9295 arg "depth-increment"
9299 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9303 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9309 arg "depth-increment"
9316 \begin_layout Standard
9321 environment, nested inside of
9322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9330 So, it's at level #4.
9331 We did this by entering
9334 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9340 arg "depth-increment"
9343 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9348 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9364 \begin_layout Standard
9369 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9372 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9378 \begin_layout Labeling
9379 \labelwidthstring MMM
9380 #4-a This is level #4.
9384 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9387 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9392 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9396 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9401 keep nesting things inside
9402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9413 \begin_layout Labeling
9414 \labelwidthstring MMM
9415 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9420 \begin_layout Labeling
9421 \labelwidthstring MMM
9422 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9423 and this is level #6.
9424 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9428 \begin_layout Labeling
9429 \labelwidthstring MMM
9430 #5-b Back to level #5.
9434 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9440 arg "depth-decrement"
9447 \begin_layout Labeling
9448 \labelwidthstring MMM
9452 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9458 arg "depth-decrement"
9461 , we're back at level #4.
9465 \begin_layout Labeling
9466 \labelwidthstring MMM
9467 #3-b Back to level #3.
9468 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9472 \begin_layout Labeling
9473 \labelwidthstring MMM
9474 #2-b Back to level #2.
9479 \begin_layout Labeling
9480 \labelwidthstring MMM
9481 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9482 After this sentence, we will enter
9486 and change the paragraph environment back to
9493 \begin_layout Standard
9494 We could have also used the
9510 environment in place of the
9515 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9518 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9519 Example 2: Inheritance
9522 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9523 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9526 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9535 arg "depth-increment"
9539 \begin_inset Newline newline
9542 which, we will change to the
9550 \begin_layout Enumerate
9555 environment, at level #2.
9558 \begin_layout Enumerate
9559 Notice how the nested
9563 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9567 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9571 \begin_layout Standard
9572 We ended this example by entering
9577 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9581 and reset the nesting depth by using
9584 arg "depth-decrement"
9590 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9591 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9600 \begin_inset Argument 1
9603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9604 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9612 \begin_layout Enumerate
9613 This is level #1, in an
9617 paragraph environment.
9618 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9622 \begin_layout Enumerate
9627 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9633 arg "depth-increment"
9637 Now, what happens if we nest an
9641 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9642 label be? An asterisk?
9646 \begin_layout Itemize
9656 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9657 So, its label is a bullet.
9658 (We got here by using
9661 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9667 arg "depth-increment"
9670 , then changing the environment to
9678 \begin_layout Itemize
9679 Here's level #4, produced using
9682 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9688 arg "depth-increment"
9692 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9697 \begin_layout Enumerate
9700 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9705 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9709 , because we are in the
9717 environment (that is, it is an
9732 \begin_layout Enumerate
9737 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9738 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9742 \begin_layout Enumerate
9743 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9746 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9749 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9752 \begin_layout Enumerate
9756 arg "depth-decrement"
9759 to decrease the depth after the next
9762 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9769 \begin_layout Enumerate
9771 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9776 \begin_layout Enumerate
9778 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9779 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9783 \begin_layout Enumerate
9784 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9793 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9798 reset the counter for the label.
9802 \begin_layout Enumerate
9806 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9812 arg "depth-decrement"
9815 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9816 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9817 into the twofold-nested
9825 \begin_layout Enumerate
9826 The same thing happens if we do another
9829 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9835 arg "depth-decrement"
9838 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9841 \begin_layout Standard
9842 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9847 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9862 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
9869 The same rule applies for the
9873 environment, as well.
9876 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9877 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9880 \begin_layout Enumerate
9881 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9882 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9883 the same detail with how we did it.
9892 \begin_layout Standard
9900 arg "depth-increment"
9907 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9908 the example in parentheses someplace.
9909 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9910 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9911 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9915 \begin_layout Enumerate
9920 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9925 Now we will add verse.
9926 \begin_inset Newline newline
9929 It will get much worse.
9930 \begin_inset Newline newline
9940 arg "depth-increment"
9951 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9952 \begin_inset Newline newline
9955 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9956 \begin_inset Newline newline
9962 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9975 \begin_layout Standard
9976 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9982 \begin_layout Standard
9984 \begin_inset Tabular
9985 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9986 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9987 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9988 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10073 \begin_layout Verse
10077 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10087 arg "depth-increment"
10093 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10099 \begin_inset Newline newline
10107 arg "depth-decrement"
10114 \begin_layout Enumerate
10119 : level #1) This is another item.
10120 Note that selecting a
10124 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10125 3 times to put the table inside the
10133 \begin_layout Quotation
10134 We're now ending the
10138 list and changing to
10143 We're still at level #1.
10144 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10145 The next set of paragraphs is a
10146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10153 We will nest both the
10160 \begin_inset space ~
10165 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10169 for the letter body.
10173 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10176 to preserve the depth.
10177 Remember that you need to use
10180 arg "newline-insert newline"
10183 to create multiple lines inside the
10190 \begin_inset space ~
10200 \begin_layout Right Address
10202 \begin_inset Newline newline
10205 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10206 \begin_inset Newline newline
10212 \begin_layout Address
10214 \begin_inset space ~
10220 \begin_layout Quotation
10221 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10222 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10225 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10226 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10227 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10228 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10229 as soon as possible.
10230 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10233 \begin_layout Quotation
10234 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10235 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10236 with your order, along with payment.
10239 \begin_layout Quotation
10240 We thank you again for your patience.
10243 \begin_layout Address
10245 \begin_inset Newline newline
10252 \begin_layout Quotation
10253 That ends that example!
10256 \begin_layout Standard
10257 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10258 gives you a lot of power with just
10260 We could have easily nested an
10281 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10284 \begin_layout Subsection
10286 \begin_inset Index idx
10289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10290 Nesting ! Separation
10296 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10298 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10305 \begin_layout Standard
10306 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10308 For example you need two different enumerations:
10311 \begin_layout Enumerate
10316 \begin_layout Enumerate
10321 \begin_layout Enumerate
10325 \begin_layout Standard
10326 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10332 \begin_layout Itemize
10338 \begin_layout Standard
10339 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10345 \begin_layout Enumerate
10349 \begin_layout Enumerate
10353 \begin_layout Enumerate
10357 \begin_layout Standard
10358 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10359 list item and use the menu
10361 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10362 Start New Environment
10365 This inserts a plain separator (red line in LyX) and behind it the new
10367 Alternatively set the cursor at the end of a list item and press
10370 arg "paragraph-break"
10374 This inserts a paragraph separator (red arrow in LyX).
10375 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10376 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10377 One can change the separator type by right-clicking on it.
10380 \begin_layout Standard
10381 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10384 arg "paragraph-break"
10387 in a Standard environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10390 \begin_layout Section
10391 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10392 \begin_inset Index idx
10395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10404 \begin_layout Standard
10405 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10406 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10408 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10409 be broken at the end of a line.
10410 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10414 \begin_layout Subsection
10416 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10418 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10423 \begin_inset Index idx
10426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10435 \begin_layout Standard
10436 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10437 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10438 ) not to break the line at
10440 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10443 \begin_layout Quote
10444 Further documentation is given in section
10445 \begin_inset Newline newline
10449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10451 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10459 \begin_layout Standard
10460 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10475 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10484 A protected space is set with
10486 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10487 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10489 \begin_inset space ~
10497 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10503 \begin_layout Subsection
10505 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10507 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10512 \begin_inset Index idx
10515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10516 Spacing ! Horizontal
10524 \begin_layout Standard
10525 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10527 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10528 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10532 The length units are listed in Appendix
10533 \begin_inset space ~
10537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10539 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10546 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10548 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10550 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10555 \begin_inset Index idx
10558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10559 Spaces ! Inter-word
10567 \begin_layout Standard
10568 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10569 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10570 at the ends of sentences.
10571 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10572 automatically takes care about this.
10573 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10574 followed by a period; see section
10575 \begin_inset space ~
10579 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10581 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10586 To insert a normal space, select
10588 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10589 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10591 \begin_inset space ~
10599 arg "space-insert normal"
10605 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10607 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10609 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10614 \begin_inset Index idx
10617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10626 \begin_layout Standard
10628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10635 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10644 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10645 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10646 inside abbreviations:
10649 \begin_layout Quote
10651 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10655 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10658 \begin_layout Standard
10659 or between values and units.
10660 Compare for example this:
10661 \begin_inset Newline newline
10665 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10669 \begin_inset Newline newline
10672 10 kg (normal space
10675 \begin_layout Standard
10676 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10678 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10679 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10681 \begin_inset space ~
10689 arg "space-insert thin"
10695 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10699 \begin_layout Standard
10700 You can also insert the following space types:
10703 \begin_layout Description
10705 \begin_inset space ~
10709 \begin_inset space ~
10712 space A line with a
10713 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10717 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10721 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10724 negative thin space between the arrows.
10727 \begin_layout Description
10729 \begin_inset space ~
10733 \begin_inset space ~
10736 space A line with a
10737 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10741 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10745 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10748 negative medium space between the arrows.
10751 \begin_layout Description
10753 \begin_inset space ~
10757 \begin_inset space ~
10760 space A line with a
10761 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10765 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10769 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10772 negative thick space between the arrows.
10775 \begin_layout Description
10777 \begin_inset space ~
10781 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10785 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10789 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10793 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10797 \begin_inset space ~
10801 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10804 em) space between the arrows.
10807 \begin_layout Description
10809 \begin_inset space ~
10813 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10817 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10821 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10825 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10829 \begin_inset space ~
10833 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10836 em) space between the arrows.
10839 \begin_layout Description
10841 \begin_inset space ~
10845 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10849 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10853 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10857 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10861 \begin_inset space ~
10865 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10868 em) space between the arrows.
10871 \begin_layout Description
10873 \begin_inset space ~
10877 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10881 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10886 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10890 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10893 cm space between the arrows.
10896 \begin_layout Standard
10898 \begin_inset space ~
10902 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10904 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10908 lists the different space sizes.
10911 \begin_layout Standard
10912 \begin_inset Float table
10917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10918 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10921 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10923 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10927 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10937 \begin_inset Tabular
10938 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
10939 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10940 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10941 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10981 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11005 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11029 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11053 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11057 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11061 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11085 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11109 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11124 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11137 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11152 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11165 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11180 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11193 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11214 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11216 \begin_inset Index idx
11219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11228 \begin_layout Standard
11229 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11230 feature for adding extra space
11231 in a uniform fashion.
11232 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11233 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11234 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11235 equally between themselves.
11238 \begin_layout Standard
11239 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11242 \begin_layout Quote
11244 This is on the left side
11245 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11248 This is on the right
11251 \begin_layout Quote
11254 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11258 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11264 \begin_layout Quote
11267 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11271 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11275 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11281 \begin_layout Standard
11282 That was an example in the
11288 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11292 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11296 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11299 is one in a standard paragraph.
11300 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11304 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11307 \begin_layout Standard
11308 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11311 \begin_inset space ~
11316 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11319 \begin_layout Standard
11321 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11325 \begin_inset space ~
11331 \begin_layout Standard
11333 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11337 \begin_inset space ~
11343 \begin_layout Standard
11345 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11349 \begin_inset space ~
11355 \begin_layout Standard
11357 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11361 \begin_inset space ~
11367 \begin_layout Standard
11369 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11373 \begin_inset space ~
11379 \begin_layout Standard
11381 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11385 \begin_inset space ~
11391 \begin_layout Standard
11392 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11400 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11404 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11406 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11407 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11411 option in the space dialog.
11419 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11421 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11423 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11428 \begin_inset Index idx
11431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11440 \begin_layout Standard
11441 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11442 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11445 \begin_layout Standard
11446 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11449 What is correct English?:
11450 \begin_inset Newline newline
11454 \begin_inset Newline newline
11458 \begin_inset space ~
11461 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11462 \begin_inset Newline newline
11466 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11477 \begin_inset Newline newline
11481 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11492 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11498 \begin_layout Standard
11500 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11505 \begin_inset space ~
11509 \begin_inset space ~
11513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11517 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11519 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11520 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11524 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11530 \begin_inset space ~
11534 \begin_inset space ~
11538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11541 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11550 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11551 That is why it is named
11552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11560 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11561 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11565 \begin_layout Subsection
11567 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11569 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11574 \begin_inset Index idx
11577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11586 \begin_layout Standard
11587 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11589 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11590 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11592 \begin_inset space ~
11598 There you find the following sizes:
11601 \begin_layout Standard
11614 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11615 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11620 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11622 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11623 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11625 \begin_inset space ~
11631 \begin_inset Index idx
11634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11635 Document ! Settings
11640 for the paragraph separation.
11641 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11652 \begin_layout Standard
11658 \begin_inset Index idx
11661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11667 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11668 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11673 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11674 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11683 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11692 s are described in section
11693 \begin_inset space ~
11697 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11699 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11708 If there are several
11712 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11713 You can therefore use
11717 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11720 \begin_layout Standard
11725 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11726 \begin_inset space ~
11730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11732 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11739 \begin_layout Standard
11740 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11750 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11751 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11763 \begin_layout Subsection
11764 Paragraph Alignment
11765 \begin_inset Index idx
11768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11769 Paragraph ! Alignment
11777 \begin_layout Standard
11778 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11780 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11783 dialog (toolbar button
11786 arg "layout-paragraph"
11790 There are five possibilities:
11793 \begin_layout Itemize
11801 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11807 \begin_layout Itemize
11815 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11821 \begin_layout Itemize
11829 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11835 \begin_layout Itemize
11843 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11849 \begin_layout Itemize
11857 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11863 \begin_layout Standard
11864 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11865 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11866 the left and right margins.
11867 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11870 \begin_layout Standard
11872 This paragraph is right aligned,
11875 \begin_layout Standard
11877 this one is centered,
11880 \begin_layout Standard
11882 this one is left aligned.
11885 \begin_layout Subsection
11887 \begin_inset Index idx
11890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11891 Page breaks ! Forced
11897 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11899 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11906 \begin_layout Standard
11907 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
11908 does the page breaks in your document, you can
11909 force a page break where you want one.
11910 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
11911 is good at page breaking.
11912 Only if you use a lot of
11916 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
11917 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11920 \begin_layout Standard
11921 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11922 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11926 have to change the page breaking.
11929 \begin_layout Standard
11930 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11932 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11934 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11935 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11937 \begin_inset space ~
11943 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11945 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11946 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11948 \begin_inset space ~
11953 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11955 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11956 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11959 \begin_layout Standard
11960 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11961 at the top of a page.
11962 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11964 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11965 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11966 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11968 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11970 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11974 to learn more about
11981 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11983 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11985 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11990 \begin_inset Index idx
11993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11994 Page breaks ! Clear
12002 \begin_layout Standard
12003 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12004 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12005 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12006 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12007 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12010 \begin_layout Standard
12011 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12013 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12014 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12016 \begin_inset space ~
12022 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12024 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12025 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12027 \begin_inset space ~
12031 \begin_inset space ~
12036 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12037 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12040 \begin_layout Subsection
12042 \begin_inset Index idx
12045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12052 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12054 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12061 \begin_layout Standard
12062 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12064 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12066 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12067 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12069 \begin_inset space ~
12073 \begin_inset space ~
12081 arg "newline-insert newline"
12085 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12087 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12088 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12090 \begin_inset space ~
12094 \begin_inset space ~
12102 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12105 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12107 This is useful to avoid
12108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12115 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12118 \begin_layout Standard
12119 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12120 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12122 very good at line breaking.
12123 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
12124 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12125 \begin_inset space ~
12129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12131 reference "sec:Quote"
12136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12138 reference "sec:Verse"
12143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12145 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12152 \begin_layout Subsection
12154 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12156 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12161 \begin_inset Index idx
12164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12173 \begin_layout Standard
12175 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12186 \begin_layout Standard
12190 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12191 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12193 \begin_inset space ~
12198 you can insert horizontal lines.
12199 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12200 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12201 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12204 \begin_layout Standard
12206 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12217 \begin_layout Section
12218 Characters and Symbols
12221 \begin_layout Standard
12222 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12223 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12224 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12226 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12232 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12236 for information on how this is done.
12239 \begin_layout Standard
12240 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12245 dialog via the menu
12247 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12248 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12254 \begin_layout Standard
12255 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12263 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12264 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12266 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12274 \begin_layout Section
12275 Fonts and Text Styles
12276 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12278 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12285 \begin_layout Subsection
12287 \begin_inset Index idx
12290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12299 \begin_layout Standard
12300 There are two types of fonts:
12303 \begin_layout Description
12305 \begin_inset space ~
12309 \begin_inset Index idx
12312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12318 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12319 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12323 characters) in the font.
12324 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12325 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12326 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12327 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12328 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12329 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12330 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12331 \begin_inset Newline newline
12334 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12335 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12336 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12337 sizes than at small ones.
12338 \begin_inset Newline newline
12352 \begin_inset space ~
12360 \begin_layout Description
12362 \begin_inset space ~
12366 \begin_inset Index idx
12369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12375 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12376 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12377 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12378 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12379 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12380 image manipulation program.
12381 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12382 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12383 \begin_inset space ~
12386 pixels high up to 34
12387 \begin_inset space ~
12390 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12391 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12392 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12394 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12395 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12396 \begin_inset Newline newline
12399 Bitmap fonts are named
12402 \begin_inset space ~
12407 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12410 \begin_layout Standard
12411 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12412 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12413 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12414 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12415 use scalable fonts.
12418 \begin_layout Standard
12419 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12422 \begin_layout Standard
12423 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12424 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12425 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12426 font to emphasize text, you use an
12427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12435 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12437 In \SpecialChar LyX
12438 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12442 \begin_layout Subsection
12445 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12447 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12454 \begin_layout Standard
12455 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12456 used its own fonts.
12457 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12458 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12461 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12462 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12463 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12464 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12465 to a word processor.
12466 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12467 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12468 files are very portable across
12469 different machines.
12470 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12471 has increased a lot
12472 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12475 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12477 \begin_inset space ~
12481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12483 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12488 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12489 code in the document
12490 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12493 \begin_layout Standard
12494 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12495 engines that are also able directly
12496 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12498 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12500 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12502 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12503 that is installed on your system.
12504 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12507 \begin_layout Standard
12508 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12516 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12517 es; so you might have to experiment.
12525 \begin_layout Standard
12526 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12535 and especially Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12536 , are still rather new and thus not as mature as tradition
12537 al \SpecialChar LaTeX
12538 or PDF\SpecialChar TeX
12547 \begin_layout Subsection
12548 Document Font and Font size
12549 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12551 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12556 \begin_inset Index idx
12559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12566 \begin_inset Index idx
12569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12578 \begin_layout Standard
12579 You can set the document fonts in the
12581 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12585 \begin_inset Index idx
12588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12589 Document ! Settings
12599 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12600 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12603 \begin_inset space ~
12612 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12614 \begin_inset space ~
12617 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12620 \begin_layout Standard
12625 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12626 This requires that you use
12638 as the output format, i.
12639 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12643 \begin_inset space \space{}
12646 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12647 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12648 installed (see section
12649 \begin_inset space ~
12653 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12655 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12660 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12662 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12663 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12665 \begin_inset space ~
12668 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12669 cannot determine the family.
12670 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12671 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12674 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12677 \begin_layout Standard
12678 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12679 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12684 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12690 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12691 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12699 \begin_inset space ~
12705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12718 European Computer Modern
12721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12728 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12731 \begin_layout Standard
12740 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12741 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12746 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12749 \begin_inset space ~
12754 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12760 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12761 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12764 \begin_layout Itemize
12768 \begin_inset space ~
12773 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12786 \begin_inset space ~
12791 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12792 community in order to replace
12796 as the default font.
12797 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12798 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12801 \begin_inset space ~
12814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12815 One difference is improved kerning.
12823 \begin_layout Itemize
12827 \begin_inset space ~
12831 \begin_inset space ~
12836 fonts in (the rare) case that
12839 \begin_inset space ~
12844 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12859 Virtual means that it
12860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12871 -glyphs from other fonts.
12872 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12894 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12900 \begin_inset Index idx
12903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12905 -packages ! aeguill
12910 with the document preamble line
12911 \begin_inset Newline newline
12918 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12919 \begin_inset Newline newline
12924 will fix the guillemet problem.
12929 and that accented characters are not
12933 glyph, but built of
12937 characters, the accent and the letter.
12938 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12944 If you search for example for the French word
12945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12952 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12961 and not for the glyph
12962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12966 \begin_inset space ~
12970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12976 \begin_layout Itemize
12977 If you do not like the look of
12985 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12986 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12990 \begin_inset space ~
12996 \begin_inset space ~
13006 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13007 \begin_inset space ~
13010 serif and typewriter fonts,
13014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13015 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13016 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13022 \begin_inset space ~
13031 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13032 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13036 \begin_inset space \space{}
13044 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13048 \begin_inset space \space{}
13054 \begin_inset space ~
13062 \begin_inset space ~
13072 but you can also select your own.
13073 \begin_inset Newline newline
13076 The differences between roman,
13079 \begin_inset space ~
13088 fonts are explained in section
13089 \begin_inset space ~
13093 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13095 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13100 \begin_inset Newline newline
13106 \begin_inset space ~
13111 was originally designed for newspapers.
13112 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13113 into the small newspaper columns.
13117 \begin_inset space ~
13122 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13125 \begin_layout Standard
13126 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13139 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13144 depends on the class you are using.
13145 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13148 \begin_layout Standard
13149 Note that the font size is the
13154 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13155 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13156 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13157 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13160 \begin_inset space ~
13166 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13167 \begin_inset space ~
13171 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13173 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13180 \begin_layout Standard
13184 \begin_inset space ~
13189 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13191 \begin_inset space ~
13194 serif or typewriter.
13199 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13209 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13212 \begin_layout Standard
13217 LaTeX font encoding
13219 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13220 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13226 \begin_inset Index idx
13229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13231 -packages ! fontenc
13237 \begin_inset space ~
13241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13243 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13248 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13249 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13256 \begin_layout Standard
13257 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13259 Use Old Style Figures
13263 Use True Small Caps
13266 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13269 Use Old Style Figures
13271 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13273 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13274 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13278 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13281 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13285 Use True Small Caps
13287 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13288 of scaled capitals.
13289 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13290 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13293 \begin_layout Standard
13298 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13299 a font to display the script characters.
13303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13304 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13310 \begin_inset Index idx
13313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13320 So this has no effect for the document language
13334 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13338 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13346 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13351 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13352 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13354 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13356 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13359 dialog, see section
13360 \begin_inset space ~
13364 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13366 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13378 \begin_layout Subsection
13382 \begin_layout Standard
13383 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13384 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13386 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13387 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13388 choose a math font in the dialog
13390 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13394 \begin_inset Index idx
13397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13398 Document ! Settings
13404 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13405 automatically selects a math font.
13406 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13407 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13416 \begin_inset space ~
13422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13427 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13428 document font is available.
13431 \begin_layout Standard
13432 Note that the math font will not be used for
13436 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13442 or by the insertion of the command
13449 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13450 \begin_inset space ~
13454 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13455 while the math characters do not.
13457 \begin_inset space ~
13460 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13463 \begin_inset space ~
13471 \begin_inset space ~
13476 in the document font settings.
13479 \begin_layout Standard
13480 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13481 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13482 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13483 font (in most cases
13484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13490 \begin_inset space ~
13496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13499 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13500 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13508 \begin_inset space ~
13514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13520 \begin_layout Subsection
13521 Using Different Character Styles
13522 \begin_inset Index idx
13525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13532 \begin_inset Index idx
13535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13544 \begin_layout Standard
13545 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13546 automatically changes the character style for certain
13547 paragraph environments.
13549 supports two character styles,
13558 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13562 \begin_layout Standard
13567 style, do one of the following:
13570 \begin_layout Itemize
13571 click on the toolbar button
13580 \begin_layout Itemize
13581 use the key binding
13590 \begin_layout Standard
13591 These commands are all toggles.
13596 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13599 \begin_layout Standard
13600 One typically uses the
13604 style for proper names.
13606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13613 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13621 \begin_layout Standard
13622 A more widely used character style is the
13627 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13634 \begin_layout Itemize
13635 clicking on the toolbar button
13644 \begin_layout Itemize
13645 using the keybindings
13654 \begin_layout Standard
13659 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13661 use a different font.
13664 \begin_layout Standard
13665 We've been using the
13669 style all over the place in this document.
13670 Here's one more example:
13673 \begin_layout Quotation
13676 Do not overuse character styles!
13679 \begin_layout Standard
13680 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13681 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13682 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13683 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13687 \begin_layout Standard
13688 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13696 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13698 \begin_inset space ~
13701 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13707 arg "dialog-show character"
13713 \begin_layout Subsection
13714 Fine-Tuning with the
13719 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13721 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13726 \begin_inset Index idx
13729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13738 \begin_layout Standard
13739 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13741 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13742 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13743 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13744 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13745 from ordinary dialog.
13748 \begin_layout Standard
13749 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13750 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13751 \begin_inset Newline newline
13754 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13755 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13758 \begin_layout Standard
13759 To use custom character styles, open the
13761 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13763 \begin_inset space ~
13766 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13769 dialog or press the toolbar button
13772 arg "dialog-show character"
13776 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13777 font property that you can choose.
13778 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13781 \begin_inset space ~
13786 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13791 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13792 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13793 environments all at once.
13796 \begin_layout Standard
13797 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13800 \begin_inset space ~
13812 \begin_layout Labeling
13813 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13827 The possible options are:
13831 \begin_layout Labeling
13832 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13837 This is the Roman font family.
13838 Normally a serif font.
13839 It's also the default family.
13849 \begin_layout Labeling
13850 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13854 \begin_inset space ~
13861 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13873 \begin_layout Labeling
13874 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13881 This is the Typewriter font family.
13887 arg "font-typewriter"
13896 \begin_layout Labeling
13897 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13902 This corresponds to the print weight.
13907 \begin_layout Labeling
13908 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13913 This is the Medium font series.
13914 It's also the default series.
13917 \begin_layout Labeling
13918 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13925 This is the Bold font series.
13938 \begin_layout Labeling
13939 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13944 As the name implies.
13949 \begin_layout Labeling
13950 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13955 This is the Upright font shape.
13956 It's also the default shape.
13959 \begin_layout Labeling
13960 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13974 s the Italic font shape
13980 \begin_layout Labeling
13981 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13988 This is the Slanted font shape
13990 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
13991 , this is different from italic).
13994 \begin_layout Labeling
13995 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13999 \begin_inset space ~
14006 This is the Small caps font shape
14013 \begin_layout Labeling
14014 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14019 Alters the text color.
14020 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14024 \begin_inset space ~
14029 , which means that the document default color set in
14031 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14032 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14038 \begin_inset space ~
14043 is used, you can choose between
14120 \begin_inset Index idx
14123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14132 \begin_layout Labeling
14133 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14138 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14139 the language of the document.
14140 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14141 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14143 \begin_inset Newline newline
14146 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14148 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14149 When using the spell checking (see section
14150 \begin_inset space ~
14154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14156 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14160 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14163 \begin_layout Labeling
14164 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14169 Alters the size of the font.
14170 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14171 proportional to the document font size.
14172 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14173 the details, but a general description of what
14179 \begin_layout Labeling
14180 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14188 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14201 arg "font-size tiny"
14207 \begin_layout Labeling
14208 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14229 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14235 \begin_layout Labeling
14236 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14257 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14263 \begin_layout Labeling
14264 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14285 arg "font-size small"
14291 \begin_layout Labeling
14292 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14306 It's also the default size.
14310 arg "font-size normal"
14316 \begin_layout Labeling
14317 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14338 arg "font-size large"
14344 \begin_layout Labeling
14345 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14366 arg "font-size larger"
14372 \begin_layout Labeling
14373 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14394 arg "font-size largest"
14400 \begin_layout Labeling
14401 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14422 arg "font-size huge"
14428 \begin_layout Labeling
14429 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14450 arg "font-size giant"
14456 \begin_layout Labeling
14457 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14462 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14482 arg "font-size increase"
14488 \begin_layout Labeling
14489 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14494 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14514 arg "font-size decrease"
14521 \begin_layout Standard
14526 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14527 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14529 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14530 — use those instead.
14531 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14534 \begin_layout Labeling
14535 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14540 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14545 \begin_layout Labeling
14546 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14553 This is text with emphasize on
14556 This might seem like the same as
14560 , but it is actually a bit different.
14566 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14568 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14571 \begin_layout Labeling
14572 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14579 This is text with Underbar on.
14585 arg "font-underline"
14591 \begin_inset Newline newline
14596 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14597 when you could not change fonts.
14598 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14599 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14600 because some people
14604 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14607 \begin_layout Labeling
14608 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14612 \begin_inset space ~
14619 This is text with Double underbar on.
14625 arg "font-underunderline"
14629 \begin_inset Newline newline
14632 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14633 about double underbar.
14636 \begin_layout Labeling
14637 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14641 \begin_inset space ~
14648 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14654 arg "font-underwave"
14658 \begin_inset Newline newline
14661 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14662 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14665 \begin_layout Labeling
14666 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14673 This is text with Strikeout on.
14679 arg "font-strikeout"
14683 \begin_inset Newline newline
14686 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14687 changed in the meantime.
14690 \begin_layout Labeling
14691 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14698 This is text with Noun on.
14705 , this is a logical attribute.
14706 Normally it's equivalent to
14709 \begin_inset space ~
14718 \begin_layout Standard
14719 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14720 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14722 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14724 \begin_inset space ~
14727 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14733 arg "dialog-show character"
14736 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14737 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14740 arg "textstyle-apply"
14744 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14748 \begin_layout Standard
14749 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14756 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14757 (suppose you just set the shape to
14758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14776 \begin_inset space ~
14788 \begin_layout Standard
14789 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14797 \begin_inset space ~
14809 \begin_layout Itemize
14815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14822 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14840 \begin_inset Newline newline
14844 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14858 \begin_inset Note Note
14861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14862 For more on phantoms see section
14863 \begin_inset space ~
14867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14869 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14879 \begin_inset Newline newline
14885 \begin_layout Itemize
14890 fonts use characters with serifs.
14891 These are the small
14892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14899 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14900 The following example shows the difference:
14901 \begin_inset Newline newline
14905 \begin_inset Newline newline
14910 text without serifs
14913 \begin_inset Newline newline
14916 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14917 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14924 \begin_layout Itemize
14929 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14930 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14931 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14934 \begin_layout Standard
14935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14942 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14943 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14946 \begin_inset space ~
14951 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14952 the property to be removed.
14953 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14954 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14955 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14973 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14974 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14982 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14986 \begin_inset space ~
14991 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15002 If you, for example, set
15003 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15021 \begin_inset space ~
15026 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15035 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15038 \begin_layout Standard
15039 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15040 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15043 \begin_layout Section
15044 Printing and Previewing
15047 \begin_layout Subsection
15051 \begin_layout Standard
15052 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15053 using \SpecialChar LyX
15054 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15055 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15056 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15057 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15059 Additional Features
15064 \begin_layout Standard
15066 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15069 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15070 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15071 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15074 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15075 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15076 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15077 to turn your writing into printable output.
15078 This happens in two stages:
15081 \begin_layout Enumerate
15082 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15083 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15085 a file with the extension,
15086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15100 \begin_layout Enumerate
15101 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15102 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15103 to use the commands in the
15107 file to produce printable output.
15110 \begin_layout Subsection
15111 Output file formats
15112 \begin_inset Index idx
15115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15122 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15124 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15131 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15132 Simple text (ASCII)
15133 \begin_inset Index idx
15136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15137 File formats ! ASCII
15145 \begin_layout Standard
15146 This file type has the extension
15147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15159 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15163 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15170 \begin_layout Standard
15171 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15173 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15174 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15176 \begin_inset space ~
15182 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15183 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15184 bibliography (section
15185 \begin_inset space ~
15189 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15191 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15196 If your document includes such material, use
15198 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15199 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15201 \begin_inset space ~
15205 \begin_inset space ~
15209 \begin_inset space ~
15217 \begin_inset space ~
15221 \begin_inset space ~
15227 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15228 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15231 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15234 \begin_inset Index idx
15237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15238 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15247 \begin_layout Standard
15248 This file type has the extension
15249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15260 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15263 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15264 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15265 -Errors or to process it manually
15266 with console commands.
15267 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15268 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15269 's temporary directory whenever you
15270 view or export your document.
15273 \begin_layout Standard
15274 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15275 -file using the menu
15277 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15278 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15282 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15283 export variants are explained in section
15284 \begin_inset space ~
15288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15290 reference "subsec:Export"
15297 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15299 \begin_inset Index idx
15302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15311 \begin_layout Standard
15312 This file type has the extension
15313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15333 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15334 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15335 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15339 \begin_layout Standard
15340 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15341 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15342 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15343 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15344 when you view the DVI.
15345 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15348 \begin_layout Standard
15349 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15351 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15352 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15357 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15358 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15360 \begin_inset space ~
15366 The latter option uses the program
15368 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15374 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15377 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15378 font access (see section
15379 \begin_inset space ~
15383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15385 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15390 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15391 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15396 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15398 \begin_inset Index idx
15401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15402 File formats ! PostScript
15410 \begin_layout Standard
15411 This file type has the extension
15412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15424 PostScript was developed by the company
15428 as a printer language.
15429 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15431 PostScript can be seen as a
15432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15435 programming language
15436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15439 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15444 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15451 \begin_inset Index idx
15454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15456 -packages ! pstricks
15466 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15469 \begin_layout Standard
15470 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15474 Encapsulated PostScript
15475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15478 (EPS, file extension
15479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15491 As \SpecialChar LyX
15492 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15493 convert them in the background to EPS.
15494 If, for example, you have 50
15495 \begin_inset space ~
15498 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15500 \begin_inset space ~
15503 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15504 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15506 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15507 EPS to avoid this problem.
15510 \begin_layout Standard
15511 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15513 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15514 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15520 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15522 \begin_inset Index idx
15525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15532 \begin_inset Index idx
15535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15544 \begin_layout Standard
15545 This file type has the extension
15546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15562 Portable Document Format
15563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15570 was derived from PostScript.
15571 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15580 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15581 looks exactly the same.
15584 \begin_layout Standard
15585 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15589 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15593 (JPG, file extension
15594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15621 Portable Network Graphics
15622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15625 (PNG, file extension
15626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15638 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15639 converts them in the
15640 background to one of these formats.
15641 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15642 will slow down your workflow.
15643 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15646 \begin_layout Standard
15647 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15649 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15655 \begin_layout Description
15657 \begin_inset space ~
15660 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15664 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15667 \begin_layout Description
15669 \begin_inset space ~
15676 ) This uses the program
15678 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15681 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15684 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15687 is a new engine, derived from
15691 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15692 access (see section
15693 \begin_inset space ~
15697 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15699 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15704 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15705 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15710 \begin_layout Description
15712 \begin_inset space ~
15719 ) This uses the program
15724 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15730 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15731 font access (see section
15732 \begin_inset space ~
15736 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15738 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15743 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15744 vertically written Japanese.
15747 \begin_layout Description
15749 \begin_inset space ~
15752 (cropped) This is the same as
15755 \begin_inset space ~
15760 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15761 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15762 to generate good-looking
15763 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15766 \begin_layout Description
15768 \begin_inset space ~
15771 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15775 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15779 \begin_layout Description
15781 \begin_inset space ~
15784 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15788 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15789 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15793 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15794 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15797 \begin_layout Standard
15801 \begin_inset space ~
15810 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15811 works without problems.
15812 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15813 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15817 \begin_inset space ~
15825 \begin_inset space ~
15830 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15838 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15840 \begin_inset Index idx
15843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15844 FileFormats ! XHTML
15850 \begin_inset Index idx
15853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15862 \begin_layout Standard
15863 This file type has the extension
15864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15876 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15877 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15878 When \SpecialChar LyX
15879 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15880 suitable for the purpose.
15881 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15883 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15884 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15887 between different formats, which are described in section
15889 Math Output in XHTML
15894 \begin_inset space ~
15902 \begin_layout Standard
15903 XHTML output remains
15904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15911 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
15912 features are supported yet.
15916 and the World Wide Web
15920 Additional Features
15922 manual, for more information.
15925 \begin_layout Standard
15926 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15928 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15929 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15935 \begin_layout Subsection
15937 \begin_inset Index idx
15940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15949 \begin_layout Standard
15950 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15951 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15960 or use the toolbar button
15967 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15968 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15969 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15975 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15979 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15981 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15985 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15987 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15992 Further output formats can be selected via
15994 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15995 View (Other Formats)
15997 or the toolbar button
15998 \begin_inset Graphics
15999 filename ../images/view-others.svgz
16002 groupId toolbarbuttons
16009 \begin_layout Standard
16010 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16011 viewer window using the menu
16013 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16018 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16019 Update (Other Formats)
16024 \begin_layout Standard
16025 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16028 To have a real output, export your document.
16031 \begin_layout Section
16032 A few Words about Typography
16033 \begin_inset Index idx
16036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16045 \begin_layout Subsection
16046 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16047 \begin_inset Index idx
16050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16057 \begin_inset Index idx
16060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16069 \begin_layout Standard
16070 In \SpecialChar LyX
16072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16083 character comes in four lengths: the
16095 , and the minus sign:
16096 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16102 \begin_layout Standard
16103 \begin_inset Tabular
16104 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16105 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16106 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16107 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16108 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16109 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16138 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16178 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16203 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16205 \begin_inset space ~
16208 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16215 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16240 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16242 \begin_inset space ~
16245 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16266 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16300 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16306 \begin_layout Standard
16307 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16319 character multiple times in a row.
16320 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16321 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16328 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16336 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16340 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16344 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16354 \begin_layout Standard
16355 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16356 math mode and has a length of its own.
16357 Here are some examples:
16360 \begin_layout Enumerate
16361 line- and page-breaks
16362 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16372 \begin_layout Enumerate
16374 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16384 \begin_layout Enumerate
16385 Oh — there's a dash.
16386 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16396 \begin_layout Enumerate
16397 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16401 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16411 \begin_layout Subsection
16413 \begin_inset Index idx
16416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16423 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16425 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16432 \begin_layout Standard
16433 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16434 but automatically in the output.
16435 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16441 \begin_inset Index idx
16444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16451 following the rules of the document language.
16454 \begin_layout Standard
16456 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16460 font and with unusual constructs, like
16461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16469 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16470 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16471 This is done with the menu
16473 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16474 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16476 \begin_inset space ~
16482 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16484 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16488 \begin_layout Standard
16489 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16490 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16501 would then see the hyphen
16502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16509 as a hyphenation possibility.
16510 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16511 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16512 as described in section
16513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16516 Prevent Hyphenation
16517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16523 \begin_inset space ~
16531 \begin_layout Subsection
16533 \begin_inset Index idx
16536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16545 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16546 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16547 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16549 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16556 \begin_layout Standard
16557 When \SpecialChar LyX
16558 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16559 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16561 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16567 appropriate amount of space.
16568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16571 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16573 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16574 gets after another word.
16577 \begin_layout Standard
16578 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16579 not work in all cases.
16581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16592 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16593 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16596 \begin_layout Standard
16597 Here are some examples of
16601 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16604 \begin_layout Itemize
16609 \begin_layout Itemize
16614 \begin_layout Standard
16615 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16618 \begin_layout Itemize
16620 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16624 this is too much space!
16627 \begin_layout Itemize
16632 \begin_layout Standard
16633 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16636 \begin_layout Standard
16637 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16640 \begin_layout Enumerate
16644 \begin_inset space ~
16649 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16650 \begin_inset space ~
16654 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16656 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16661 \begin_inset Index idx
16664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16665 Spaces ! inter-word
16673 \begin_layout Enumerate
16677 \begin_inset space ~
16682 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16683 \begin_inset space ~
16687 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16689 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16694 \begin_inset Index idx
16697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16706 \begin_layout Enumerate
16710 \begin_inset space ~
16714 \begin_inset space ~
16718 \begin_inset space ~
16725 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16727 \begin_inset space ~
16732 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16733 This function is also bound to
16736 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16742 \begin_layout Standard
16743 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16746 \begin_layout Itemize
16748 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16752 \begin_inset space \space{}
16755 this is too much space!
16758 \begin_layout Itemize
16759 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16763 \begin_layout Standard
16764 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16765 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16767 will take care of this.
16770 \begin_layout Standard
16771 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16775 \begin_inset space ~
16781 feature described in the section
16783 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16788 Additional Features
16793 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16795 \begin_inset Index idx
16798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16799 Typography ! Quotes
16805 \begin_inset Index idx
16808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16839 \begin_layout Standard
16841 usually sets quotes correctly.
16842 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16843 and use a closing quote at the end.
16845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16853 The keyboard character,
16857 , generates this automatically.
16860 \begin_layout Standard
16861 You can specify what character the
16865 key produces using the submenu
16871 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16875 \begin_inset Index idx
16878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16879 Document ! Settings
16889 There are six choices:
16892 \begin_layout Labeling
16893 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16916 \begin_layout Labeling
16917 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16920 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16924 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16930 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16934 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16940 \begin_layout Labeling
16941 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16944 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16948 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16954 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16958 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16964 \begin_layout Labeling
16965 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16968 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16972 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16978 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16982 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16988 \begin_layout Labeling
16989 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16992 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16996 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17002 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17006 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17012 \begin_layout Labeling
17013 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17016 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17020 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17026 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17030 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17036 \begin_layout Standard
17037 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
17040 arg "quote-insert single"
17046 \begin_layout Subsection
17048 \begin_inset Index idx
17051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17052 Typography ! Ligatures
17058 \begin_inset Index idx
17061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17090 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17092 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17099 \begin_layout Standard
17100 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17101 print them as single characters.
17102 These groups are known as
17107 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17108 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17110 Here are the standard ligatures:
17113 \begin_layout Itemize
17117 \begin_layout Itemize
17121 \begin_layout Itemize
17125 \begin_layout Itemize
17129 \begin_layout Itemize
17133 \begin_layout Standard
17134 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17137 \begin_layout Standard
17138 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17139 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17147 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17148 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17163 To break a ligature, use
17165 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17166 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17168 \begin_inset space ~
17175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17186 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17203 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17211 \begin_layout Subsection
17213 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
17215 \begin_inset Index idx
17218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17226 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17228 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17235 \begin_layout Standard
17238 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17242 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
17245 \begin_layout Description
17247 The name of the game.
17250 \begin_layout Description
17252 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
17256 \begin_layout Description
17258 The \SpecialChar TeX
17259 macro colletion used by \SpecialChar LyX
17263 \begin_layout Description
17264 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
17265 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17269 \begin_layout Standard
17270 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17276 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17284 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
17285 world to give programs geek version numbers.
17286 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
17287 converges to the number
17288 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17291 : The actual version is
17292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17300 , the previous one was
17301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17312 \begin_layout Subsection
17314 \begin_inset Index idx
17317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17326 \begin_layout Standard
17327 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17328 space between two words.
17329 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17339 for units use the menu
17341 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17342 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17344 \begin_inset space ~
17352 arg "space-insert thin"
17358 \begin_layout Standard
17359 Here is an example to show the differences:
17362 \begin_layout Standard
17363 \begin_inset Tabular
17364 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17365 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17366 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17367 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17374 \begin_inset space ~
17378 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17390 space between number and unit
17397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17402 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17406 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17418 half space between number and unit
17431 \begin_layout Subsection
17433 \begin_inset Index idx
17436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17437 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17445 \begin_layout Standard
17446 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17448 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17449 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17450 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17451 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17452 These bits of text became known as
17463 \begin_layout Standard
17464 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
17465 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17466 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17467 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17468 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17469 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
17470 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
17471 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
17472 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17473 \begin_inset Newline newline
17481 \begin_inset Newline newline
17489 \begin_inset Newline newline
17492 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17493 preamble of your document to avoid them.
17494 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
17496 \begin_inset space ~
17500 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17502 key "latexcompanion"
17507 \begin_inset space ~
17511 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17517 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17518 's page break mechanism.
17521 \begin_layout Chapter
17522 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17523 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17525 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17532 \begin_layout Standard
17533 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17536 \begin_inset space ~
17542 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17545 \begin_layout Section
17547 \begin_inset Index idx
17550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17557 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17566 \begin_layout Standard
17568 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17571 \begin_layout Description
17574 \begin_inset space ~
17577 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17578 \begin_inset Newline newline
17582 \begin_inset Note Note
17585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17586 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17594 \begin_layout Description
17595 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17596 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17597 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17600 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17601 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17603 \begin_inset space ~
17609 \begin_inset Newline newline
17613 \begin_inset Note Comment
17616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17617 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
17626 \begin_layout Description
17628 \begin_inset space ~
17631 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17632 set in the document settings under
17634 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
17636 \begin_inset space ~
17642 \begin_inset Newline newline
17646 \begin_inset Newline newline
17650 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17659 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17660 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17665 of a comment that appears in the output.
17671 \begin_inset Newline newline
17675 \begin_inset Newline newline
17678 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17681 \begin_layout Standard
17682 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17690 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17694 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17697 \begin_layout Section
17699 \begin_inset Index idx
17702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17709 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17711 name "sec:Footnotes"
17718 \begin_layout Standard
17720 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
17723 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17726 or the toolbar button
17729 arg "footnote-insert"
17741 \begin_inset Graphics
17742 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17751 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17752 's representation of your footnote.
17762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17781 label, the box will
17785 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17786 Clicking on the box label again will close
17799 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17800 and click on the footnote
17815 \begin_layout Standard
17816 Here is an example footnote:
17824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17825 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17833 \begin_layout Standard
17834 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17835 position where the footnote box is placed.
17836 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17837 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
17838 according to the document class.
17840 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
17841 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
17847 ey are described in the
17850 \begin_inset space ~
17858 \begin_layout Section
17860 \begin_inset Index idx
17863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17870 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17872 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17879 \begin_layout Standard
17880 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
17882 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17884 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17886 \begin_inset space ~
17891 or the toolbar button
17894 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17920 appearing within your text.
17921 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17922 's representation of your margin
17931 \begin_layout Standard
17932 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17936 \begin_inset Marginal
17939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17941 This is a marginal note.
17949 \begin_layout Standard
17950 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17951 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17952 pages, right on odd pages.
17955 \begin_layout Standard
17956 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17959 \begin_inset space ~
17967 \begin_inset space ~
17975 \begin_layout Section
17976 Graphics and Images
17977 \begin_inset Index idx
17980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17987 \begin_inset Index idx
17990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17997 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17999 name "sec:Graphics"
18006 \begin_layout Standard
18007 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
18008 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18011 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18016 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18020 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18023 \begin_layout Standard
18024 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18029 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18030 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18032 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18033 \begin_inset space ~
18037 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18039 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18046 \begin_layout Standard
18051 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18052 of the image in the output.
18053 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18057 \begin_inset space ~
18061 \begin_inset space ~
18070 \begin_inset space ~
18074 \begin_inset space ~
18078 \begin_inset space ~
18083 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18084 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18092 \begin_layout Standard
18096 \begin_inset space ~
18100 \begin_inset space ~
18105 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18106 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18108 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18113 \begin_inset space ~
18118 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18119 with the image size is printed.
18122 \begin_layout Standard
18123 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18124 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18126 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18129 \begin_layout Standard
18131 \begin_inset Graphics
18132 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18140 \begin_layout Standard
18141 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18142 the image into a float, see section
18143 \begin_inset space ~
18147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18149 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
18156 \begin_layout Subsection
18158 \begin_inset Index idx
18161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18168 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18170 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
18177 \begin_layout Standard
18178 You can insert images in any known file format.
18179 But as we explained in section
18180 \begin_inset space ~
18184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18186 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18190 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18192 therefore uses the program
18196 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18197 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18198 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18199 \begin_inset space ~
18203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18205 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18212 \begin_layout Standard
18213 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18216 \begin_layout Description
18218 \begin_inset space ~
18221 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18222 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18223 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18227 Graphics Interchange Format
18228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18231 (GIF, file extension
18232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18244 \begin_inset Index idx
18247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18279 Portable Network Graphics
18280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18283 (PNG, file extension
18284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18296 \begin_inset Index idx
18299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18331 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18335 (JPG, file extension
18336 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18360 \begin_inset Index idx
18363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18394 \begin_layout Description
18396 \begin_inset space ~
18399 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18401 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18402 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18403 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18404 \begin_inset Newline newline
18407 Scalable image formats can be
18408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18411 Scalable Vector Graphics
18412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18415 (SVG, file extension
18416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18428 \begin_inset Index idx
18431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18463 Encapsulated PostScript
18464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18467 (EPS, file extension
18468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18480 \begin_inset Index idx
18483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18515 Portable Document Format
18516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18519 (PDF, file extension
18520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18532 \begin_inset Index idx
18535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18550 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18551 result will not be scalable.
18552 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18558 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18566 \begin_layout Standard
18567 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18574 \begin_layout Subsection
18575 Grouping of Image Settings
18576 \begin_inset Index idx
18579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18580 Images ! Settings grouping
18588 \begin_layout Standard
18589 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18591 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18592 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18594 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18595 need to manually change each of them.
18599 \begin_layout Standard
18600 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18603 \begin_inset space ~
18607 \begin_inset space ~
18619 \begin_inset space ~
18623 \begin_inset space ~
18629 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18630 and checking the name of the desired group.
18633 \begin_layout Section
18635 \begin_inset Index idx
18638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18645 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18654 \begin_layout Standard
18655 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18658 arg "tabular-insert"
18663 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18667 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18668 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18669 from the rest of the table.
18670 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18671 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18673 Here is an example table:
18676 \begin_layout Standard
18678 \begin_inset Tabular
18679 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18680 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18681 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18682 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18683 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18684 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18884 \begin_layout Subsection
18888 \begin_layout Standard
18889 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18892 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
18896 This brings up the table dialog.
18897 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18898 cursor is placed currently.
18899 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18900 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18901 done on all of your selection.
18904 \begin_layout Standard
18905 In addition to the table dialog, the
18908 \begin_inset space ~
18913 helps you in setting table properties.
18914 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18917 \begin_layout Standard
18921 \begin_inset space ~
18926 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18927 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18928 current cell respectively.
18929 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18931 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18932 of text, see section
18933 \begin_inset space ~
18937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18939 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
18946 \begin_layout Standard
18947 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18948 using the check box
18957 This will merge the cells to
18961 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
18962 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
18963 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
18964 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
18965 in the last row without the upper border:
18968 \begin_layout Standard
18970 \begin_inset Tabular
18971 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
18972 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
18973 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18974 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
18975 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18976 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18987 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18996 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19072 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19107 \begin_layout Standard
19108 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19109 -arguments for the table.
19110 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19111 explained in the chapter
19118 \begin_inset space ~
19124 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19125 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
19126 but are visible in the output.
19129 \begin_layout Standard
19130 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19138 Most DVI-viewers are
19142 able to display rotations.
19150 \begin_layout Standard
19155 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19160 adds lines for all cell borders.
19163 \begin_layout Subsection
19165 \begin_inset Index idx
19168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19169 Tables ! Longtables
19175 \begin_inset Index idx
19178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19187 \begin_layout Standard
19188 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19191 \begin_inset space ~
19195 \begin_inset space ~
19204 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19205 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19208 \begin_layout Description
19213 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19214 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19215 except for the first page, if
19218 \begin_inset space ~
19226 \begin_layout Description
19230 \begin_inset space ~
19235 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19236 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19239 \begin_layout Description
19244 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19245 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19246 except for the last page, if
19249 \begin_inset space ~
19257 \begin_layout Description
19261 \begin_inset space ~
19266 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19267 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19270 \begin_layout Description
19271 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19272 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19274 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19278 More about longtable captions can be found in the
19281 \begin_inset space ~
19289 \begin_layout Standard
19290 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19291 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19292 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19298 In this context, first means first in this order:
19301 \begin_inset space ~
19313 \begin_inset space ~
19318 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19321 \begin_layout Standard
19323 \begin_inset Tabular
19324 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19325 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19326 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19327 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19328 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19329 <row endfirsthead="true">
19330 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19336 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19341 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19350 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19360 <row endfirsthead="true">
19361 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19372 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19381 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19393 <row endhead="true">
19394 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19405 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19414 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19424 <row endhead="true">
19425 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19436 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19445 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19457 <row endfoot="true">
19458 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19469 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19478 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19509 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20450 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20459 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20468 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20479 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20510 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20541 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20572 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20603 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20634 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20665 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20696 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20727 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20758 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20789 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20820 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20851 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20882 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20913 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20944 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20975 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21006 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21037 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21068 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21099 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21130 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21161 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21192 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21223 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21254 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21285 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21316 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21347 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21378 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21409 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21439 <row endlastfoot="true">
21440 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21451 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21460 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21477 \begin_layout Subsection
21479 \begin_inset Index idx
21482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21489 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21491 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
21498 \begin_layout Standard
21499 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21500 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21501 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21502 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21506 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21509 \begin_layout Standard
21510 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21511 for the column in the table dialog.
21512 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21513 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21517 \begin_layout Standard
21519 \begin_inset Tabular
21520 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21521 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21522 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21523 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21524 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21544 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21613 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21669 This is longer now.
21674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21725 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21726 This is longer now.
21731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21757 \begin_layout Standard
21758 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21759 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21764 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21765 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21771 Selection with the mouse or with
21775 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21776 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21777 the selection from outside the table.
21780 \begin_layout Section
21782 \begin_inset Index idx
21785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21792 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21801 \begin_layout Subsection
21805 \begin_layout Standard
21806 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21807 have a fixed location.
21809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21816 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21824 \begin_inset space ~
21829 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21830 too many notes on the current page.
21833 \begin_layout Standard
21834 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21835 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21836 and pages without text.
21837 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21838 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21839 Floats are therefore numbered.
21840 Referencing is described in section
21841 \begin_inset space ~
21845 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21847 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21854 \begin_layout Standard
21855 To insert a float, use the menu
21857 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21861 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21862 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21864 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21865 \begin_inset Index idx
21868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21874 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21875 paragraph within the float.
21876 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
21877 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
21878 left-clicking on the box label.
21879 A closed float box looks like this:
21880 \begin_inset Graphics
21881 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
21886 – a gray button with a red label.
21889 \begin_layout Standard
21890 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
21892 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21895 \begin_layout Subsection
21897 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21899 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
21904 \begin_inset Index idx
21907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21908 Floats ! Figure floats
21916 \begin_layout Standard
21918 \begin_inset space ~
21922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21924 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21928 was created using the menu
21930 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21931 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
21937 arg "float-insert figure"
21941 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21944 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21950 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21954 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21955 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
21957 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
21959 \begin_inset space ~
21967 arg "layout-paragraph"
21973 \begin_layout Standard
21974 \begin_inset Float figure
21979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21981 \begin_inset Graphics
21982 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21992 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21995 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21997 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22001 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22014 \begin_layout Standard
22015 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22016 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22018 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22027 ) and refer to it using the menu
22029 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22035 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22039 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22040 vague references like
22041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22048 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
22049 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
22051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22059 For more about cross-references, see section
22060 \begin_inset space ~
22064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22066 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22073 \begin_layout Standard
22074 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22075 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22076 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22077 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22078 as described in section
22079 \begin_inset space ~
22083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22085 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22091 \begin_inset space ~
22095 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22097 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22101 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22102 You can also set the images one below the other.
22104 \begin_inset space ~
22108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22110 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22117 reference "fig:Platypus"
22121 are the subfigures.
22124 \begin_layout Standard
22125 \begin_inset Float figure
22130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22131 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22135 \begin_inset Float figure
22140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22141 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22144 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22146 name "fig:Undefinable"
22158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22159 \begin_inset Graphics
22160 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22171 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22175 \begin_inset Float figure
22180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22181 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22184 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22186 name "fig:Platypus"
22198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22199 \begin_inset Graphics
22200 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22212 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22219 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22222 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22224 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22228 Two distorted images.
22241 \begin_layout Subsection
22243 \begin_inset Index idx
22246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22247 Floats ! Table floats
22255 \begin_layout Standard
22256 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22258 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22259 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22262 or the toolbar button
22265 arg "float-insert table"
22269 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22270 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22271 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22273 \begin_inset space ~
22277 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22279 reference "tab:Table-float"
22286 \begin_layout Standard
22287 \begin_inset Float table
22292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22293 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22296 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22298 name "tab:Table-float"
22310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22312 \begin_inset Tabular
22313 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22314 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22315 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22316 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22317 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22444 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22465 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22468 \end{array}\right]$
22476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22489 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22510 \begin_layout Subsection
22512 \begin_inset Index idx
22515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22524 \begin_layout Standard
22526 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22527 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22528 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22530 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22538 \begin_inset space ~
22546 \begin_layout Section
22548 \begin_inset Index idx
22551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22560 \begin_layout Standard
22562 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
22564 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22565 \begin_inset space \space{}
22572 \begin_layout Standard
22573 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
22574 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22576 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22580 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22581 and its alignment within the page.
22584 \begin_layout Standard
22586 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22596 height_special "totalheight"
22601 backgroundcolor "none"
22604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22607 This is a minipage.
22608 The text is set in an italic style.
22611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22614 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22615 another formatting.
22623 \begin_layout Standard
22624 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22627 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22631 as described in section
22632 \begin_inset space ~
22636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22638 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
22643 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22649 \begin_layout Standard
22650 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22660 height_special "totalheight"
22665 backgroundcolor "none"
22668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22669 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22670 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22676 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22680 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22690 height_special "totalheight"
22695 backgroundcolor "none"
22698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22699 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22700 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22708 \begin_layout Standard
22709 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22715 \begin_layout Standard
22716 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22718 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22725 \begin_inset space ~
22733 \begin_layout Chapter
22734 Mathematical Formulas
22735 \begin_inset Index idx
22738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22745 \begin_inset Index idx
22748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22777 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22779 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22786 \begin_layout Standard
22787 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22792 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22795 \begin_layout Section
22797 \begin_inset Index idx
22800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22809 \begin_layout Standard
22810 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22823 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22825 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22826 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22827 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22829 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22835 \begin_layout Standard
22836 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22840 \begin_inset space ~
22845 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22848 \begin_layout Standard
22849 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22850 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22853 \begin_layout Standard
22854 This is a line with an inline formula
22855 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22861 \begin_layout Standard
22862 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22863 paragraph, like this one:
22864 \begin_inset Formula
22871 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22874 \begin_layout Standard
22876 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
22878 For example, typing
22879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22892 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22893 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22897 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22900 \begin_inset space ~
22908 \begin_layout Subsection
22909 Navigating in Formulas
22910 \begin_inset Index idx
22913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22922 \begin_layout Standard
22923 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22924 achieved with the arrow keys.
22926 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22927 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22932 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22933 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22937 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22941 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22944 \end{array}\right]$
22952 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22957 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22958 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22961 \begin_layout Standard
22966 , printed in this document as
22967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22971 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22978 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22979 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22980 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
22985 For example, if you want
22986 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
22994 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23004 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23008 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23013 , since in the latter case only the
23016 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23021 will be under the square root sign:
23022 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23028 \begin_layout Standard
23029 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23031 \begin_inset Formula
23033 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23042 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23043 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23046 \begin_layout Subsection
23050 \begin_layout Standard
23051 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23052 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23056 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23057 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23058 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23059 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23060 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23064 \begin_layout Subsection
23065 Exponents and Subscripts
23066 \begin_inset Index idx
23069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23076 \begin_inset Index idx
23079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23088 \begin_layout Standard
23089 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23092 arg "math-superscript"
23098 arg "math-subscript"
23101 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23103 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23106 , type in a formula
23109 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23119 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23125 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23129 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23135 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23141 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23150 , you have to use an extra
23154 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23155 For example, if you want
23156 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23162 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23168 Subscripts are similar: To get
23169 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23175 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23183 \begin_layout Subsection
23185 \begin_inset Index idx
23188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23197 \begin_layout Standard
23198 Create a fraction either with the command
23204 or by using the icon
23207 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23213 \begin_inset space ~
23219 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23220 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23221 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23226 To move back up, press
23231 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23232 \begin_inset Formula
23234 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23237 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23245 \begin_layout Subsection
23247 \begin_inset Index idx
23250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23259 \begin_layout Standard
23260 Roots can be created using the
23263 \begin_inset space ~
23271 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23277 arg "math-insert \\root"
23299 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23305 always produces a square root.
23308 \begin_layout Subsection
23309 Operators with Limits
23310 \begin_inset Index idx
23313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23320 \begin_inset Index idx
23323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23330 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23332 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23339 \begin_layout Standard
23341 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23345 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23348 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23349 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23350 by entering them as you would enter a super-
23351 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23352 The sum operator will automatically place its
23353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23360 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23362 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23366 \begin_inset Formula
23368 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23373 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23377 \begin_layout Standard
23378 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23380 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23381 behind the operator and using the menu
23383 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23384 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23386 \begin_inset space ~
23390 \begin_inset space ~
23404 \begin_layout Standard
23405 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23414 \begin_inset Index idx
23417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23424 \begin_inset Formula
23426 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23431 which will place the
23432 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23444 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23445 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23451 \begin_layout Standard
23452 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23459 Have a look at section
23460 \begin_inset space ~
23464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23466 reference "subsec:Functions"
23470 for an explanation of function macros.
23473 \begin_layout Subsection
23475 \begin_inset Index idx
23478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23487 \begin_layout Standard
23488 Most math symbols can be found in the
23491 \begin_inset space ~
23496 under one of several categories; including
23513 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23517 \begin_layout Standard
23518 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23519 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
23520 don't have to use the
23523 \begin_inset space ~
23528 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23530 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23533 \begin_layout Subsection
23535 \begin_inset Index idx
23538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23547 \begin_layout Standard
23548 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23554 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23560 \begin_inset space ~
23568 arg "math-insert \\space"
23572 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23573 For example, the sequence
23578 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
23581 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
23583 \begin_inset Graphics
23584 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23589 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23590 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23591 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23592 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
23593 , because they are negative
23595 Here are two examples:
23598 \begin_layout Standard
23608 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23614 \begin_layout Standard
23624 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
23630 \begin_layout Subsection
23632 \begin_inset Index idx
23635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23642 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23644 name "subsec:Functions"
23651 \begin_layout Standard
23655 \begin_inset space ~
23660 contains under the button
23663 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23666 a number of function macros, such as
23667 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23671 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23679 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23686 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23687 avoid confusions, because
23688 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23692 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23698 \begin_layout Standard
23699 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23701 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23705 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23711 \begin_layout Standard
23712 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23713 are placed, as described in section
23714 \begin_inset space ~
23718 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23720 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23727 \begin_layout Subsection
23729 \begin_inset Index idx
23732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23741 \begin_layout Standard
23742 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23744 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23745 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
23746 commands, for example, to enter
23747 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23750 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23751 Our example is entered by typing
23756 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23763 \begin_inset space ~
23767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23769 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23773 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23776 \begin_layout Standard
23777 \begin_inset Float table
23782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23783 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23786 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23788 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23792 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23802 \begin_inset Tabular
23803 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23804 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23805 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23806 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23807 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23891 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23945 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23999 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24053 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24107 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24161 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24215 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24269 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24323 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24368 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24389 \begin_layout Standard
24390 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24393 \begin_inset space ~
24401 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24404 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24408 \begin_layout Section
24409 Brackets and Delimiters
24410 \begin_inset Index idx
24413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24420 \begin_inset Index idx
24423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24430 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24432 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24439 \begin_layout Standard
24440 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
24442 For some purposes, using just the keys
24447 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24448 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24449 toolbar delimiter icon
24452 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24456 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24457 \begin_inset Formula
24459 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24467 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24468 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24472 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24475 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24481 \begin_inset Formula
24483 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24491 \begin_layout Standard
24492 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24493 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24497 \begin_layout Standard
24498 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24499 left side and right side.
24500 If you use the option
24503 \begin_inset space ~
24508 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24509 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
24511 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24516 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
24517 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24520 \begin_layout Standard
24521 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24522 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24523 is to go inside the brackets.
24524 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24529 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24530 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24531 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24535 arg "math-delim ( )"
24541 \begin_layout Section
24542 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24543 \begin_inset Index idx
24546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24553 \begin_inset Index idx
24556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24563 \begin_inset Index idx
24566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24567 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24575 \begin_layout Standard
24576 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24580 \begin_inset space ~
24588 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24592 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24593 Here is an example:
24594 \begin_inset Formula
24596 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24605 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24606 \begin_inset space ~
24610 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24612 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24617 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24618 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24619 This alignment is set in the box
24624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24673 for every column as default.
24674 For example, the sequence
24675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24683 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24686 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24687 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24688 corresponds to the relevant column.
24689 The result will look like this:
24690 \begin_inset Formula
24693 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
24694 column & has & has\,right\\
24695 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
24704 \begin_layout Standard
24705 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24708 arg "newline-insert newline"
24711 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24712 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24714 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24717 or the math toolbar.
24720 \begin_layout Standard
24721 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24722 It can be created with the menu
24724 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24725 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24727 \begin_inset space ~
24739 Here is an example:
24740 \begin_inset Formula
24754 \begin_layout Standard
24755 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24758 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24761 arg "newline-insert newline"
24765 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24770 arg "newline-insert newline"
24773 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24781 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24782 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24783 A new row is created by every further entry of
24786 arg "newline-insert newline"
24790 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24791 Here is an example:
24792 \begin_inset Formula
24794 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24795 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24800 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24801 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24802 \begin_inset Formula
24804 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24812 \begin_layout Standard
24813 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24820 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24821 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24824 reference "eq:asquared"
24829 The other types are described in section
24830 \begin_inset space ~
24834 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24836 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
24843 \begin_layout Section
24844 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24845 \begin_inset Index idx
24848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24849 Math ! Formula numbering
24855 \begin_inset Index idx
24858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24859 Math ! Referencing formulas
24865 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24867 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24874 \begin_layout Standard
24875 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24877 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24878 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24880 \begin_inset space ~
24884 \begin_inset space ~
24892 arg "math-number-toggle"
24896 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24897 within parentheses.
24898 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24899 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24900 the document class.
24901 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24902 separated by a dot:
24903 \begin_inset Formula
24913 arg "math-number-toggle"
24916 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24917 You can only number displayed formulas.
24920 \begin_layout Standard
24921 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24923 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24924 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24926 \begin_inset space ~
24930 \begin_inset space ~
24938 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24941 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24942 \begin_inset Formula
24945 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24951 To number all lines use the shortcut
24954 arg "math-number-toggle"
24960 \begin_layout Standard
24961 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24964 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24965 A label is inserted with the menu
24967 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24976 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24977 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24978 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24990 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24991 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24992 We inserted in the following example the label
24993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25000 in the second line:
25001 \begin_inset Formula
25003 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25004 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25009 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25010 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25011 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25013 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25015 \begin_inset space ~
25023 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25027 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25028 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25029 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25030 as the formula number:
25033 \begin_layout Standard
25034 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25035 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25037 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25044 \begin_layout Standard
25045 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
25046 's cross-reference box are described in section
25047 \begin_inset space ~
25051 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25053 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25058 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25066 \begin_layout Section
25067 User defined math macros
25068 \begin_inset Index idx
25071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25080 \begin_layout Standard
25082 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25083 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25084 Math macros are explained in section
25087 \begin_inset space ~
25099 \begin_layout Section
25103 \begin_layout Subsection
25105 \begin_inset Index idx
25108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25117 \begin_layout Standard
25118 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25119 To set a font in a formula, use the
25122 \begin_inset space ~
25130 arg "math-insert \\font"
25133 , or enter its command, listed in table
25134 \begin_inset space ~
25138 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25140 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25147 \begin_layout Standard
25148 \begin_inset Float table
25153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25154 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25157 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25159 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25163 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25173 \begin_inset Tabular
25174 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25175 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25176 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25177 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25209 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25236 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25263 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25296 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25323 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25350 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25384 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25411 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25445 \begin_layout Standard
25446 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25454 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25470 \begin_layout Standard
25471 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25472 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25477 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25478 space when you need a space in the box.
25479 Here is an example where
25480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25491 denotes the set of numbers:
25492 \begin_inset Formula
25494 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
25502 \begin_layout Standard
25503 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25504 You can, for example, put a character in
25513 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25517 \begin_inset Newline newline
25520 So it is better not to use this feature.
25523 \begin_layout Standard
25524 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25525 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25529 \begin_inset Newline newline
25532 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25538 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25539 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25545 \begin_layout Standard
25552 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25555 \begin_layout Standard
25556 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25558 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25559 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25561 \begin_inset space ~
25569 \begin_layout Subsection
25571 \begin_inset Index idx
25574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25583 \begin_layout Standard
25584 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25586 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25590 \begin_inset space ~
25594 \begin_inset space ~
25602 \begin_inset space ~
25610 arg "math-insert \\font"
25614 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25615 in black instead of blue.
25616 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25617 Here is an example:
25618 \begin_inset Formula
25621 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25622 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25631 \begin_layout Subsection
25633 \begin_inset Index idx
25636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25645 \begin_layout Standard
25646 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25647 automatically chosen in most situations.
25665 For most characters,
25673 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25674 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25679 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25680 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
25681 thinks are appropriate.
25682 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25685 arg "math-insert \\style"
25689 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25690 For example, you can set
25691 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25694 , which is normally in
25703 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25707 The four styles are used in the following example:
25710 \begin_layout Standard
25711 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25715 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25719 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25723 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25729 \begin_layout Standard
25730 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25731 is set in a particular size with the menu
25733 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25735 \begin_inset space ~
25740 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25741 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25742 will be adjusted to correspond.
25743 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25754 \begin_layout Standard
25758 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25764 \begin_layout Section
25765 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25767 \begin_inset Index idx
25770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25777 \begin_inset Index idx
25780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25789 \begin_layout Standard
25791 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
25792 that are in common use.
25795 \begin_layout Subsection
25796 Enabling AMS-Support
25799 \begin_layout Standard
25800 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25801 the document by selecting the checkbox
25804 \begin_inset space ~
25808 \begin_inset space ~
25812 \begin_inset space ~
25819 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25823 \begin_inset Index idx
25826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25827 Document ! Settings
25835 \begin_inset space ~
25841 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
25842 -errors in formulas,
25843 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25846 \begin_layout Subsection
25848 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25850 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25855 \begin_inset Index idx
25858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25859 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25867 \begin_layout Standard
25868 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25869 provides a selection of different formula types.
25871 allows you to choose between
25892 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25893 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25899 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25902 \begin_layout Chapter
25906 \begin_layout Section
25908 \begin_inset Index idx
25911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25918 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25920 name "sec:Cross-References"
25927 \begin_layout Standard
25928 One of \SpecialChar LyX
25929 's strengths is cross-references.
25930 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25932 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25933 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25934 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25937 \begin_layout Enumerate
25941 \begin_layout Enumerate
25942 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25944 name "enu:Second-item"
25951 \begin_layout Enumerate
25955 \begin_layout Standard
25956 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25958 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25961 or by pressing the toolbar button
25968 A gray label box like this:
25969 \begin_inset Graphics
25970 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
25975 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25977 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26012 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26013 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26029 \begin_layout Standard
26030 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26032 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26035 or the toolbar button
26038 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26042 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26043 \begin_inset Graphics
26044 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
26049 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26051 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26064 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26068 \begin_layout Standard
26069 As an alternative to
26071 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26074 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26079 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26080 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26082 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26094 \begin_layout Standard
26095 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26096 \begin_inset space ~
26100 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26102 reference "enu:Second-item"
26109 \begin_layout Standard
26110 It is recommended to use a protected space
26114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26115 described in section
26116 \begin_inset space ~
26120 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26122 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
26131 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26132 line breaks between them.
26135 \begin_layout Standard
26136 There are six formats of cross-references:
26139 \begin_layout Description
26140 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26143 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26150 \begin_layout Description
26151 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26152 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26162 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26164 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26171 \begin_layout Description
26172 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26173 \begin_inset space ~
26177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26178 LatexCommand pageref
26179 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26186 \begin_layout Description
26188 \begin_inset space ~
26192 \begin_inset space ~
26195 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26196 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26197 LatexCommand vpageref
26198 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26203 \begin_inset Newline newline
26206 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26207 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26208 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26209 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26210 it prints “on the next page”.
26211 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26214 \begin_layout Description
26216 \begin_inset space ~
26220 \begin_inset space ~
26224 \begin_inset space ~
26227 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26230 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26235 \begin_inset Newline newline
26238 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26244 ; otherwise it behaves like
26248 \begin_inset space ~
26252 \begin_inset space ~
26261 \begin_layout Description
26263 \begin_inset space ~
26266 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26267 \begin_inset Newline newline
26271 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26279 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26289 \begin_inset Index idx
26292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26294 -packages ! prettyref
26300 \begin_inset Index idx
26303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26305 -packages ! refstyle
26316 \begin_inset Newline newline
26319 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
26320 -package should be used for this feature by setting
26323 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26327 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26328 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26336 is the default and preferred because
26340 supports only English documents.
26341 The format is specified by using the command
26353 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26354 preamble of the document.
26355 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26368 ) can be done with this command
26369 \begin_inset Newline newline
26376 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26381 \begin_inset Newline newline
26384 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26386 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26388 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26395 \begin_layout Description
26397 \begin_inset space ~
26400 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26402 LatexCommand nameref
26403 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26410 \begin_layout Standard
26411 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26412 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
26414 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26418 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26422 \begin_layout Standard
26423 You can only use the style
26427 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26431 is always possible.
26434 \begin_layout Standard
26435 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26436 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26438 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26439 \begin_inset space ~
26443 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26445 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26452 \begin_layout Standard
26453 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26457 \begin_inset space ~
26461 \begin_inset space ~
26466 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26467 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26470 \begin_inset space ~
26475 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26476 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26479 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26485 \begin_layout Standard
26486 You can change labels at any time.
26487 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26488 do not need to think about this.
26491 \begin_layout Standard
26492 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
26494 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
26498 \begin_layout Standard
26499 References are described in detail in the section
26500 \begin_inset space ~
26504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26514 \begin_inset space ~
26522 \begin_layout Section
26523 Table of Contents and other Listings
26524 \begin_inset Index idx
26527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26534 \begin_inset Index idx
26537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26544 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26553 \begin_layout Subsection
26555 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26557 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
26564 \begin_layout Standard
26565 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26567 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26568 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26570 \begin_inset space ~
26574 \begin_inset space ~
26580 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
26582 If you click on it, the
26586 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26587 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26588 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26590 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
26592 \begin_inset space ~
26597 that is described in section
26598 \begin_inset space ~
26602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26604 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
26611 \begin_layout Standard
26612 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26613 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26615 \begin_inset space ~
26619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26621 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26625 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26627 \begin_inset space ~
26631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26633 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
26637 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26639 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26642 \begin_layout Subsection
26643 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26644 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26646 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26653 \begin_layout Standard
26654 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26656 You can insert them via the
26658 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26662 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26665 \begin_layout Section
26666 URLs and Hyperlinks
26667 \begin_inset Index idx
26670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26677 \begin_inset Index idx
26680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26689 \begin_layout Subsection
26691 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26700 \begin_layout Standard
26701 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26703 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26709 \begin_layout Standard
26710 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
26712 \begin_inset Flex URL
26715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26725 \begin_layout Standard
26726 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26732 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26736 \begin_layout Standard
26737 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26745 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26754 \begin_layout Subsection
26756 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26758 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
26765 \begin_layout Standard
26766 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26768 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26771 or with the toolbar button
26778 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26787 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26788 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26789 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26791 name "LyX's homepage"
26792 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26796 , an Email address like this:
26797 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26799 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26800 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26805 , or a link to a file.
26808 \begin_layout Standard
26809 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26822 to the link target.
26825 \begin_layout Standard
26826 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26827 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26828 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26829 the text style dialog.
26830 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26834 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26836 name "LyX's homepage"
26837 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26844 \begin_layout Standard
26845 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26849 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26851 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26852 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26856 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26858 \begin_inset Newline newline
26866 \begin_inset Newline newline
26873 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26876 \begin_layout Section
26878 \begin_inset Index idx
26881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26888 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26890 name "sec:Appendices"
26897 \begin_layout Standard
26898 Appendices are created with the menu
26900 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26902 \begin_inset space ~
26906 \begin_inset space ~
26912 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26913 as the appendix part of the book.
26914 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26917 \begin_layout Standard
26918 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26919 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26920 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26921 and the subsection number.
26922 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26926 \begin_layout Standard
26928 \begin_inset space ~
26932 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26934 reference "chap:Credits"
26939 \begin_inset space ~
26943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26945 reference "subsec:Export"
26952 \begin_layout Section
26954 \begin_inset Index idx
26957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26966 name "sec:Bibliography"
26973 \begin_layout Standard
26974 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
26976 You can include a bibliography database,
26980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26981 Known under the name
26982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26985 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26995 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26996 manually, using the paragraph environment
27000 , which was described in section
27001 \begin_inset space ~
27005 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27007 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
27012 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
27013 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
27017 use a bibliography database.
27020 \begin_layout Subsection
27021 The Bibliography Environment
27024 \begin_layout Standard
27029 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27031 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27040 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27042 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
27045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27052 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27055 \begin_layout Standard
27056 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27058 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27061 or the toolbar button
27064 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27068 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27069 containing the available citations.
27070 Select one or more keys from the list and
27080 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27081 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27085 \begin_layout Standard
27086 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27087 entry with surrounding brackets.
27092 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27093 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27105 \begin_layout Standard
27109 Companion Second Edition
27112 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27114 key "latexcompanion"
27121 \begin_layout Standard
27122 The \SpecialChar LyX
27123 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
27124 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27133 \begin_layout Standard
27134 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27137 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27139 \begin_inset space ~
27147 arg "layout-paragraph"
27151 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27154 \begin_layout Subsection
27155 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27157 \begin_inset Index idx
27160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27161 Bibliography ! Databases
27167 \begin_inset Index idx
27170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27171 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27178 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27180 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27187 \begin_layout Standard
27188 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27194 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27196 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27197 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27202 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27204 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27205 your working field in a database.
27206 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27207 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27208 list for that document.
27209 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27213 \begin_layout Standard
27214 The database is a text file with the file extension
27215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27226 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27227 The format is explained in
27228 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27234 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27236 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27238 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27243 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27244 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27245 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
27247 \begin_inset Flex URL
27250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27252 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27260 \begin_layout Standard
27261 To use a database, use the menu
27263 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27268 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27270 \begin_inset space ~
27276 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27277 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27284 Add bibliography to TOC
27286 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27291 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27292 in the document or just the cited references.
27295 \begin_layout Standard
27296 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27308 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27309 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27310 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27311 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27313 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27319 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27320 \begin_inset Newline newline
27324 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27326 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27338 \begin_layout Standard
27339 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27342 \begin_layout Standard
27343 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
27344 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27346 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
27353 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27354 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27359 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
27360 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
27361 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
27365 The following variants are possible:
27368 \begin_layout Description
27369 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27370 with other bibliography packages (e.
27371 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27375 \begin_inset space \space{}
27382 ), only with the package
27386 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27390 \begin_layout Description
27391 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27392 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27393 with all bibliography packages, except
27398 \begin_layout Description
27399 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27404 , works with all bibliography packages
27407 \begin_layout Standard
27408 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27409 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27411 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27414 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27418 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27427 \begin_layout Standard
27428 When you select the option
27430 Sectioned bibliography
27434 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27435 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27438 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27439 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27441 Customizing Bibliographies
27445 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27450 Additional Features
27455 \begin_layout Standard
27456 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27457 the two methods of creating them.
27458 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27459 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27460 We used the style file
27464 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27467 \begin_layout Subsection
27469 \begin_inset Index idx
27472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27473 Bibliography ! Citation format
27481 \begin_layout Standard
27482 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27483 For this feature you need to enable the option
27489 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27493 \begin_inset Index idx
27496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27497 Document ! Settings
27507 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27508 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27509 style files as explained in
27510 the previous section.
27513 \begin_layout Standard
27514 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27515 the citation reference window.
27516 Here is an example where the text
27517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27521 \begin_inset space ~
27525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27528 appears after the reference:
27531 \begin_layout Standard
27533 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27536 key "latexcompanion"
27543 \begin_layout Section
27545 \begin_inset Index idx
27548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27555 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27564 \begin_layout Standard
27565 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27567 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27569 \begin_inset space ~
27574 or the toolbar button
27581 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27582 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27583 by \SpecialChar LyX
27584 as the index entry.
27587 \begin_layout Standard
27588 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27590 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27591 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27593 \begin_inset space ~
27599 A light blue box labeled
27600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27611 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27612 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
27616 \begin_layout Standard
27617 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27618 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
27619 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
27620 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27622 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27624 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27631 \begin_layout Subsection
27632 Grouping Index Entries
27633 \begin_inset Index idx
27636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27645 \begin_layout Standard
27646 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27648 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27649 lists under the entry
27650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27658 First we create the entry
27659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27667 \begin_inset space ~
27671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27673 reference "subsec:Lists"
27678 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27679 \begin_inset space ~
27683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27685 reference "sec:Itemize"
27689 , we insert the command
27692 \begin_layout Standard
27698 \begin_layout Standard
27702 \begin_layout Standard
27708 \begin_layout Standard
27709 for the enumerated list in section
27710 \begin_inset space ~
27714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27716 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27723 \begin_layout Standard
27724 The exclamation mark
27725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27732 marks the grouping levels.
27733 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27734 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27735 If we don't have an index entry for
27736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27743 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27746 \begin_layout Subsection
27748 \begin_inset Index idx
27751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27752 Index ! Page ranges
27760 \begin_layout Standard
27761 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27763 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27764 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27765 an index entry in section
27766 \begin_inset space ~
27770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27772 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27779 \begin_layout Standard
27782 Paragraph environments|(
27785 \begin_layout Standard
27786 and another entry at the end of section
27787 \begin_inset space ~
27791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27793 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
27800 \begin_layout Standard
27803 Paragraph environments|)
27806 \begin_layout Standard
27808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27831 respectively start and end the index range.
27832 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27833 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27834 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27835 An example is the index entry
27836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27839 Document ! Settings
27840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27846 \begin_layout Subsection
27848 \begin_inset Index idx
27851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27852 Index ! Cross referencing
27860 \begin_layout Standard
27861 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27862 We referred for example in the index entry
27863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27871 \begin_inset space ~
27875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27877 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
27881 ) to the index entry
27882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27889 in the same section using the entry
27892 \begin_layout Standard
27895 GIF|see{Image formats}
27898 \begin_layout Standard
27899 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
27901 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27902 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27905 \begin_layout Subsection
27907 \begin_inset Index idx
27910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27911 Index ! Entry order
27919 \begin_layout Standard
27920 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27921 follow the rules for the index order.
27922 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
27927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27928 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27930 \begin_inset space ~
27934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27936 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
27945 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27946 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27971 \begin_inset Index idx
27974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27975 Dummy entries ! maïs
27981 \begin_inset Index idx
27984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27985 Dummy entries ! maître
27991 \begin_inset Index idx
27994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27995 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
28000 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
28001 maïs, maison, maître.
28002 To achieve this, we use the command
28005 \begin_layout Standard
28008 previous entry@current entry
28011 \begin_layout Standard
28012 In our case we want to have
28013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28028 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28031 \begin_layout Standard
28037 \begin_layout Standard
28038 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28039 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
28041 See the next subsection for an example.
28044 \begin_layout Standard
28045 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28051 \begin_layout Standard
28052 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28057 to generate the index (see sec.
28058 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28064 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28073 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28074 -package aeguill in sec.
28075 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28081 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
28085 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
28086 -packages although all these index
28087 commands start with
28088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28101 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28106 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28109 \begin_layout Standard
28121 \begin_layout Standard
28133 \begin_layout Subsection
28135 \begin_inset Index idx
28138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28139 Index ! Entry layout
28147 \begin_layout Standard
28148 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28149 \begin_inset Index idx
28152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28155 This is an italic dummy entry
28160 You can also format the page number using the character
28161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28168 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28169 -command without a backslash.
28170 We can write for example
28173 \begin_layout Standard
28176 italic page number:|textit
28179 \begin_layout Standard
28180 to get the page number in italic.
28181 \begin_inset Index idx
28184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28185 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28190 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
28191 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
28193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28209 \begin_inset space ~
28215 Have a look at section
28216 \begin_inset space ~
28220 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28222 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28226 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28230 \begin_layout Standard
28231 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28239 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28243 to generate the index, see sec.
28244 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28248 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28250 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28259 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28264 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28265 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28268 key "latexcompanion"
28280 \begin_layout Standard
28281 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28283 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28284 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28285 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28286 If so, put the following in the preamble
28289 \begin_layout Standard
28301 \begin_layout Standard
28305 \begin_layout Standard
28311 \begin_layout Standard
28312 in the index entry.
28313 \begin_inset Index idx
28316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28317 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28322 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28323 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28324 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28327 \begin_layout Standard
28328 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28329 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28330 a bold font for all index entries.
28331 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28343 documentation for details,
28344 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28346 key "makeindex,xindy"
28353 \begin_layout Subsection
28355 \begin_inset Index idx
28358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28365 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28367 name "subsec:Index-Program"
28374 \begin_layout Standard
28375 If the index generation program
28379 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
28380 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28384 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28385 distribution, is used.
28389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28394 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28395 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28396 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28397 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28398 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28408 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
28410 dialog, see section
28411 \begin_inset space ~
28415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28417 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
28422 The available options are listed and explained in
28423 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28425 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
28430 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28434 \begin_layout Standard
28435 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28436 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
28439 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28440 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28444 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28445 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28448 \begin_layout Subsection
28452 \begin_layout Standard
28453 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28454 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28462 next to the standard index.
28464 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28465 that add this feature.
28472 \begin_inset Index idx
28475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28477 -packages ! splitidx
28482 package to generate multiple indexes.
28483 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
28488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28489 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
28491 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28498 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28499 style, but it also includes
28500 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28501 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28509 \begin_layout Standard
28510 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
28511 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28513 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28514 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28517 and select the option
28519 Use multiple Indexes
28526 already contains the standard index
28527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28535 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28536 also appear as a heading) to the
28540 input field and press the
28545 The new index now also appears in the list.
28546 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
28547 label color to the new index.
28550 \begin_layout Standard
28551 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28554 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28561 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28562 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28563 are additional features:
28566 \begin_layout Itemize
28567 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28568 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28571 \begin_layout Itemize
28572 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28573 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28581 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28582 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28583 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28584 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28587 \begin_layout Section
28588 Nomenclature/Glossary
28589 \begin_inset Index idx
28592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28599 \begin_inset Index idx
28602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28631 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28633 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28640 \begin_layout Standard
28641 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28642 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28643 called nomenclature or glossary.
28646 \begin_layout Standard
28647 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28654 \begin_inset Index idx
28657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28659 -packages ! nomencl
28665 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
28667 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28673 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28677 \begin_layout Standard
28678 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28679 and then use the menu
28681 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28687 \begin_inset space ~
28692 or the toolbar button
28695 arg "nomencl-insert"
28700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28711 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28714 \begin_layout Standard
28715 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28716 The first is the term or
28720 that you wish to define.
28725 of the term or symbol.
28728 \begin_layout Standard
28729 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28737 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
28738 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28746 \begin_layout Subsection
28747 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28748 \begin_inset Index idx
28751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28752 Nomenclature ! Layout
28760 \begin_layout Standard
28761 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28765 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
28768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28772 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28780 \begin_inset Newline newline
28788 \begin_inset Newline newline
28794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28801 character starts/ends the formula.
28802 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
28803 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
28805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28815 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28825 \begin_layout Standard
28826 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28827 -syntax is given in section
28828 \begin_inset space ~
28832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28834 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28841 \begin_layout Standard
28845 \begin_inset space ~
28850 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
28852 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28857 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28864 in this document is:
28865 \begin_inset Newline newline
28870 dummy entry for the character
28875 \begin_inset Newline newline
28887 \begin_inset space ~
28897 font use the command
28926 \begin_layout Standard
28927 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
28928 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28932 \begin_inset space \space{}
28936 \begin_inset Newline newline
28952 \begin_inset Newline newline
28955 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
28956 This command will make the font of all symbols
28963 \begin_inset space ~
28971 \begin_layout Standard
28972 If the characters |
28973 \begin_inset space \space{}
28977 \begin_inset space \space{}
28981 \begin_inset space \space{}
28985 \begin_inset space \space{}
28989 \begin_inset space \space{}
28992 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28993 a quote character in front of them.
28994 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28995 LatexCommand nomenclature
28996 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28997 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
29004 \begin_layout Subsection
29005 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
29006 \begin_inset Index idx
29009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29010 Nomenclature ! Sort order
29018 \begin_layout Standard
29019 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29020 -code of the symbol
29022 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
29024 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
29027 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29028 LatexCommand nomenclature
29030 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
29037 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29041 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29042 LatexCommand nomenclature
29045 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
29050 They will be sorted by
29051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29077 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29080 will be sorted before the
29084 since the character
29085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29092 is considered in sorting.
29095 \begin_layout Standard
29096 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29099 \begin_inset space ~
29104 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29105 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29107 For the example given, you can insert
29111 in this field for the
29112 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29119 will be located before
29120 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29126 \begin_layout Standard
29127 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29132 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29141 \begin_layout Subsection
29142 Nomenclature Options
29143 \begin_inset Index idx
29146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29147 Nomenclature ! Options
29155 \begin_layout Standard
29160 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29161 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29164 \begin_layout Description
29165 refeq Appends the phrase
29166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29181 to every nomenclature entry, where
29187 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29190 \begin_layout Description
29191 refpage Appends the phrase
29192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29207 to every nomenclature entry, where
29213 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29216 \begin_layout Description
29217 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29220 \begin_layout Standard
29221 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29222 class options list in the
29224 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29228 In this document the options
29235 \begin_layout Standard
29236 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29242 \begin_layout Standard
29243 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29244 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29249 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29252 \begin_layout Description
29262 \begin_layout Description
29265 nomrefpage Like the
29272 \begin_layout Description
29275 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29284 \begin_layout Description
29288 \begin_inset space ~
29294 \begin_inset space ~
29299 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29302 \begin_layout Standard
29304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29311 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29312 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29316 \begin_layout Standard
29324 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29327 \begin_inset Newline newline
29334 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29339 \begin_inset Newline newline
29343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29358 by their translation.
29361 \begin_layout Subsection
29362 Printing the Nomenclature
29363 \begin_inset Index idx
29366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29367 Nomenclature ! Printing
29375 \begin_layout Standard
29376 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29378 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29379 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29395 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29396 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29397 You can choose between these settings:
29400 \begin_layout Description
29401 Default a space of 1
29402 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29408 \begin_layout Description
29410 \begin_inset space ~
29414 \begin_inset space ~
29417 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29420 \begin_layout Description
29421 Custom custom space
29424 \begin_layout Standard
29425 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29434 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29442 For example, in order to change the name to
29446 , add the following line to the preamble:
29449 \begin_layout Standard
29457 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29460 \begin_layout Subsection
29461 Nomenclature Program
29462 \begin_inset Index idx
29465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29466 Nomenclature ! Program
29472 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29474 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
29481 \begin_layout Standard
29487 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
29488 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29490 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29495 by adding options, see section
29496 \begin_inset space ~
29500 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29502 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
29507 The available options are listed and explained in
29508 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29510 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29517 \begin_layout Section
29519 \begin_inset Index idx
29522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29529 \begin_inset Index idx
29532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29533 Document ! Branches
29539 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29541 name "sec:Branches"
29548 \begin_layout Standard
29549 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29550 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29551 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29552 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29555 \begin_layout Standard
29556 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
29557 allows you to put text into branches.
29558 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29559 To create a branch, either select the menu
29561 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29562 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
29565 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29567 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29574 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29575 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29576 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
29577 and whether the name of the branch should
29578 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29579 (see below for an example).
29580 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29581 to the name of the other) and to add
29582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29590 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29594 \begin_inset space ~
29597 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29598 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29601 \begin_layout Standard
29602 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29603 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29605 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29608 where you can choose a branch.
29609 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29613 \begin_layout Standard
29614 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29615 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29618 \begin_layout Standard
29619 \begin_inset Branch Question
29622 \begin_layout Standard
29623 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29631 \begin_layout Standard
29632 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29635 \begin_layout Standard
29636 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29644 \begin_layout Standard
29651 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29652 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29655 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29656 Consider for example a file
29657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29664 which has the above branches.
29666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29673 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29697 branch were inactive,
29698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29713 branch was active, likewise
29714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29729 branch was active, and
29730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29733 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29737 if both branches were active.
29738 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29741 \begin_layout Standard
29742 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29748 \begin_layout Standard
29749 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29750 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
29751 definitions for each branch.
29752 For example you can define for the question branch
29756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29757 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29758 -syntax, see section
29759 \begin_inset space ~
29763 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29765 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29777 \begin_layout Standard
29787 \begin_layout Standard
29797 \begin_layout Standard
29798 and for the answer branch
29801 \begin_layout Standard
29811 \begin_layout Standard
29821 \begin_layout Standard
29822 \begin_inset Branch Question
29825 \begin_layout Standard
29829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29857 \begin_layout Standard
29858 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29861 \begin_layout Standard
29865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29893 \begin_layout Standard
29894 Now it is possible to use the
29898 question{\SpecialChar ldots
29905 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
29908 commands to obtain conditional output.
29909 Here is an example formula where only the
29916 \begin_inset Formula
29918 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29926 \begin_layout Standard
29927 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29935 \begin_layout Standard
29936 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29938 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29942 \begin_inset space \space{}
29945 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
29947 For this advanced usage, see the
29952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29955 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29962 \begin_layout Section
29964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29966 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29971 \begin_inset Index idx
29974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29983 \begin_layout Standard
29986 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29987 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29990 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29992 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29998 \begin_inset Index idx
30001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30003 -packages ! hyperref
30008 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
30009 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
30010 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
30011 part of the document.
30015 \begin_layout Standard
30016 The header information in the dialog tab
30020 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
30021 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
30022 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
30023 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
30027 \begin_inset space ~
30031 \begin_inset space ~
30036 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
30037 tries to extract the header information from your document title
30038 and author entries.
30042 \begin_inset space ~
30046 \begin_inset space ~
30050 \begin_inset space ~
30055 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
30058 \begin_layout Standard
30059 You can specify in the dialog tab
30063 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
30068 \begin_inset space ~
30072 \begin_inset space ~
30076 \begin_inset space ~
30081 option allows long links to be split;
30084 \begin_inset space ~
30088 \begin_inset space ~
30092 \begin_inset space ~
30100 \begin_inset space ~
30105 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30108 \begin_inset space ~
30113 colors the different links.
30114 The default colors are:
30117 \begin_layout Labeling
30118 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30123 for hyperlinks and URLs
30126 \begin_layout Labeling
30127 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30135 \begin_layout Labeling
30136 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30144 \begin_layout Standard
30145 but you can change these in the field
30150 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30153 \begin_layout Standard
30156 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30159 \begin_layout Standard
30164 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30165 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30166 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30169 \begin_layout Standard
30174 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30175 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30176 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30186 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30187 when opening the PDF.
30189 \begin_inset space ~
30192 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30193 \begin_inset space ~
30196 1 will only display the sections.
30199 \begin_layout Standard
30200 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30201 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30207 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30208 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30217 \begin_layout Section
30219 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30221 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30223 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30230 \begin_layout Subsection
30233 \begin_inset Index idx
30236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30244 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30246 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30253 \begin_layout Standard
30254 As \SpecialChar LyX
30255 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
30256 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30257 commands and constructs,
30260 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30261 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30262 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30263 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30264 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
30265 cannot support all packages and
30269 \begin_layout Standard
30270 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
30271 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
30272 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
30276 Code box is created by the menu
30278 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30280 \begin_inset space ~
30285 or by the toolbar button
30298 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30306 \begin_layout Standard
30307 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
30309 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
30311 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30312 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30319 , you can write the command part
30325 in a \SpecialChar TeX
30326 Code box before the word and the closing brace
30330 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
30331 Code box behind the word.
30332 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
30333 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
30337 \begin_layout Standard
30338 \begin_inset Graphics
30339 filename clipart/ERT.png
30347 \begin_layout Standard
30351 \begin_layout Standard
30352 This is a line with a
30356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30379 \begin_layout Standard
30380 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30388 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30389 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30390 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
30391 know that the command is finished.
30399 \begin_layout Subsection
30400 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30402 \begin_inset Argument 1
30405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30406 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30413 \begin_inset Index idx
30416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30424 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30426 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30433 \begin_layout Standard
30434 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30435 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30436 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
30437 uses in the background.
30438 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
30439 is based on commands, you can
30440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30448 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30449 any time if you know the right commands.
30450 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30451 is the end of the day.
30452 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30453 all caption labels bold.
30454 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30456 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30460 \begin_layout Standard
30461 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
30463 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30465 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30468 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30477 \begin_layout Standard
30478 As result you find that the package
30483 \begin_inset Index idx
30486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30488 -packages ! caption
30494 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30496 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30499 \SpecialChar menuseparator
30503 \begin_inset space ~
30511 \begin_layout Standard
30516 usepackage[options]{package name}
30519 \begin_layout Standard
30520 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
30521 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30522 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30523 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30526 \begin_layout Standard
30527 In your case the package name is
30532 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30537 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30538 So you add the command
30541 \begin_layout Standard
30546 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30549 \begin_layout Standard
30550 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30555 For more commands provided by the
30559 package, have a look at its documentation,
30560 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30574 \begin_layout Standard
30575 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30577 For example if you use a
30581 class, you don't need the package
30585 , you can instead write
30588 \begin_layout Standard
30593 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30598 \begin_layout Standard
30599 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30600 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30601 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30608 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30611 \begin_layout Standard
30612 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30613 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30615 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30616 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
30617 Code box as described in the previous
30621 \begin_layout Standard
30622 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30623 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30626 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30628 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30635 \begin_layout Standard
30636 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30642 \begin_layout Standard
30646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30656 \begin_inset Note Note
30659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30660 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30668 \begin_layout Left Header
30669 \begin_inset Argument 1
30672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30692 \begin_inset Note Note
30695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30696 defines the header line as described below
30704 \begin_layout Center Header
30705 \begin_inset Argument 1
30708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30717 \begin_layout Right Header
30718 \begin_inset Argument 1
30721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30742 \begin_layout Left Footer
30743 \begin_inset Argument 1
30746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30767 \begin_layout Center Footer
30768 \begin_inset Argument 1
30771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30783 \begin_inset Newline newline
30787 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30793 \begin_layout Right Footer
30794 \begin_inset Argument 1
30797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30819 \begin_layout Section
30820 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30821 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30823 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30828 \begin_inset Index idx
30831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30832 Document ! Header/Footer line
30838 \begin_inset Index idx
30841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30850 \begin_layout Standard
30851 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30855 \begin_inset space ~
30866 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30872 \begin_inset space ~
30878 As a second step add in the menu
30880 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30881 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30888 Custom Header/Footerlines
30889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30893 This module offers the following 6
30894 \begin_inset space ~
30900 \begin_layout Description
30902 \begin_inset space ~
30906 \begin_inset space ~
30910 \begin_inset space ~
30914 \begin_inset space ~
30918 \begin_inset space ~
30924 \begin_layout Description
30926 \begin_inset space ~
30930 \begin_inset space ~
30934 \begin_inset space ~
30938 \begin_inset space ~
30942 \begin_inset space ~
30948 \begin_layout Standard
30949 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30952 \begin_layout Standard
30953 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30954 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30956 \begin_inset space ~
30960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30962 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30966 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30969 \begin_layout Standard
30970 \begin_inset Float figure
30976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30979 \begin_inset Tabular
30980 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30981 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
30982 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30983 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30984 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30986 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31004 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31015 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31033 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31044 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
31047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31048 The normal text on the page goes here.
31049 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
31051 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
31052 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
31057 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31066 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31077 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31095 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31106 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31124 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31142 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31145 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31147 name "fig:Page-layout"
31151 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31164 \begin_layout Standard
31165 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31173 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31177 \begin_inset space ~
31182 is set to “Default”.
31183 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31192 \begin_layout Subsection
31196 \begin_layout Standard
31197 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
31198 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
31199 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31200 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31202 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
31203 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31206 \begin_layout Standard
31207 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
31208 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31212 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31214 \begin_inset space ~
31222 \begin_layout Description
31225 thepage prints the current page number
31228 \begin_layout Description
31231 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31234 \begin_layout Description
31237 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31240 \begin_layout Description
31243 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31244 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31251 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31254 because it usually goes in a left header.
31257 \begin_layout Description
31260 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31261 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31263 It is normally used in the right header.
31266 \begin_layout Subsection
31267 Default header/footer
31270 \begin_layout Standard
31271 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31272 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31273 footer has the page number.
31274 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31275 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31276 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31279 \begin_inset space ~
31287 \begin_layout Subsection
31291 \begin_layout Standard
31292 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31293 Some pages are different.
31294 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
31295 a new part or chapter in your book.
31296 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31297 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31298 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31301 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31302 Header and footer decoration line
31305 \begin_layout Standard
31306 By default, you get a 0.4
31307 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31310 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31311 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31323 in the following way:
31326 \begin_layout Standard
31333 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31336 \begin_layout Standard
31337 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31346 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31347 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31353 \begin_layout Standard
31354 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31356 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
31357 \begin_inset space ~
31361 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31370 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31371 Several header/footer lines
31374 \begin_layout Standard
31375 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31376 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31377 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31379 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31394 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31395 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31397 \begin_inset space ~
31405 \begin_layout Standard
31412 headheight}{height}
31415 \begin_layout Standard
31416 where height is a size in standard units.
31417 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31418 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31419 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31420 logfile with the menu
31422 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31428 \begin_inset space ~
31433 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31438 \begin_inset Index idx
31441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31443 -packages ! fancyhdr
31449 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31450 for your header/footer.
31453 \begin_layout Subsection
31457 \begin_layout Standard
31458 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31459 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31460 This example consists of the following definition:
31463 \begin_layout Description
31465 \begin_inset space ~
31474 , empty optional argument
31477 \begin_layout Description
31479 \begin_inset space ~
31482 Header empty, empty optional argument
31485 \begin_layout Description
31487 \begin_inset space ~
31496 in the optional argument
31499 \begin_layout Description
31501 \begin_inset space ~
31510 in the optional argument
31513 \begin_layout Description
31515 \begin_inset space ~
31528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31532 \begin_inset Newline newline
31536 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31543 in the optional argument
31546 \begin_layout Description
31548 \begin_inset space ~
31557 , empty optional argument
31560 \begin_layout Description
31563 headrulewidth set to 2
31564 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31570 \begin_layout Standard
31571 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31572 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31578 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31587 \begin_layout Standard
31588 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31594 \begin_layout Standard
31598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31602 pagestyle{headings}
31608 \begin_inset Note Note
31611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31612 switches back to page style with the default headings
31620 \begin_layout Section
31621 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31622 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31624 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31629 \begin_inset Index idx
31632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31639 \begin_inset Index idx
31642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31651 \begin_layout Standard
31653 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
31654 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31655 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31658 \begin_layout Subsection
31662 \begin_layout Standard
31663 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31669 \begin_inset Index idx
31672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31674 -packages ! preview-latex
31679 (on some systems named simply
31684 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31686 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31692 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31694 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31702 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
31703 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31704 -package are automatically
31705 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
31709 \begin_layout Subsection
31713 \begin_layout Standard
31714 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31715 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31717 activate the option
31720 \begin_inset space ~
31727 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31733 \begin_inset space ~
31737 \begin_inset space ~
31740 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
31747 \begin_inset space ~
31760 \begin_inset space ~
31765 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31768 \begin_layout Standard
31769 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31774 \begin_inset space ~
31782 \begin_inset space ~
31790 \begin_layout Standard
31791 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
31792 and when you finish
31796 \begin_layout Standard
31797 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31805 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31806 generated by activating the option
31809 \begin_inset space ~
31815 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31823 \begin_layout Subsection
31824 Selected document parts
31827 \begin_layout Standard
31828 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31829 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
31830 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
31831 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31833 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31835 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31839 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31840 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31841 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31844 \begin_layout Standard
31845 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31852 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31864 is explained in section
31866 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31871 \begin_inset space ~
31881 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
31882 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31883 the final rotated boxes,
31884 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
31885 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31887 Here is the result:
31890 \begin_layout Standard
31891 \begin_inset Preview
31893 \begin_layout Standard
31898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31902 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31908 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31918 height_special "totalheight"
31923 backgroundcolor "none"
31926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31951 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31957 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31979 \begin_layout Standard
31980 Previewing works also for colors.
31981 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32000 is explained in section
32007 \begin_inset space ~
32020 \begin_layout Standard
32021 \begin_inset Preview
32023 \begin_layout Standard
32027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32046 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
32051 This is text within a colored, framed box.
32055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32070 \begin_layout Standard
32071 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
32077 \begin_layout Standard
32078 If \SpecialChar LyX
32079 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
32080 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
32081 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
32082 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32083 packages in your document preamble that are required by
32084 the \SpecialChar TeX
32086 If \SpecialChar LyX
32087 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
32088 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
32090 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
32091 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
32092 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
32095 \begin_layout Subsection
32100 \begin_layout Standard
32101 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32102 source of the whole document or parts of it.
32105 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32107 \begin_inset space ~
32112 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32114 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32116 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
32117 's main window, then only this selection
32118 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32119 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32120 the source view window.
32125 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
32126 ; but note that if you have
32127 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
32129 not just the one which is open at the time.
32132 \begin_layout Section
32133 Advanced Find and Replace
32134 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32136 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32141 \begin_inset Index idx
32144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32151 \begin_inset Index idx
32154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32163 \begin_layout Subsection
32167 \begin_layout Standard
32168 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
32169 allows for searching of complex,
32170 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
32172 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32173 The key-features are:
32176 \begin_layout Itemize
32177 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32178 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32179 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32183 \begin_layout Itemize
32184 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32185 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32186 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32187 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32190 \begin_layout Itemize
32191 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32192 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32193 outside of mathematics environments
32196 \begin_layout Itemize
32197 Search may be widened to a specific
32202 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32206 \begin_inset space ~
32209 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32210 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32217 \begin_layout Itemize
32218 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32219 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32220 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32224 \begin_inset space ~
32227 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32230 \begin_layout Subsection
32234 \begin_layout Standard
32235 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32237 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32250 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32253 ) or the toolbar button
32256 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32262 Advanced Find and Replace
32267 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32271 \begin_layout Standard
32277 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32281 \begin_inset space ~
32286 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32289 arg "paragraph-break"
32293 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32294 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32298 arg "paragraph-break"
32301 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32305 searches backwards.
32308 \begin_layout Standard
32312 \begin_inset space ~
32317 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32326 \begin_inset space ~
32331 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32334 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32335 Searching for mathematics
32338 \begin_layout Standard
32339 Mathematical formulas, such as
32340 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32343 or something more complex like
32344 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32347 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32352 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32353 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32354 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32355 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
32361 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32365 \begin_layout Standard
32366 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32367 This is done by switching to the
32371 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32376 This way, entering in the
32383 \begin_layout Itemize
32384 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32385 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32388 \begin_layout Itemize
32389 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32390 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32393 \begin_layout Itemize
32394 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32395 of it only within section headings.
32396 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32397 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32401 \begin_layout Itemize
32402 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32403 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32406 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32410 \begin_layout Standard
32411 The entries made in the
32415 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32418 \begin_inset space ~
32424 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32428 button or alternatively press
32431 arg "paragraph-break"
32438 while the cursor is in the
32441 \begin_inset space ~
32449 \begin_layout Standard
32450 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
32452 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32456 \begin_layout Itemize
32457 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32458 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32466 with its typewriter version
32467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32481 \begin_layout Itemize
32482 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32488 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32500 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32507 (you may want to enable the
32510 \begin_inset space ~
32518 \begin_inset space ~
32523 options and disable the
32531 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32539 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32540 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32544 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
32547 , or occurrences of
32548 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32552 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32558 \begin_layout Subsection
32562 \begin_layout Standard
32563 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32568 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32570 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32572 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32581 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32587 This is done with the context menu
32589 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32590 Insert Regular Expression
32592 while the cursor is in the
32597 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32598 expression matching rules
32602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32603 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
32606 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32610 \begin_inset space ~
32613 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
32614 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
32620 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32621 same text in the document.
32622 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32623 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32626 \begin_layout Enumerate
32627 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32632 editor the fraction
32633 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32637 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32640 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32641 fractions with the given denominator.
32644 \begin_layout Enumerate
32645 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32657 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32662 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32663 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32664 Also, by inserting a
32665 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32668 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32669 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32672 \begin_layout Standard
32673 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32674 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32675 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32678 , and referring back to them through
32679 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32683 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32687 For example, try searching with the regexp
32688 \begin_inset Newline newline
32691 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32694 \begin_inset Newline newline
32697 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32700 \begin_layout Standard
32701 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32704 \begin_layout Standard
32705 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32713 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32714 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32715 sub-expressions is absolute.
32717 \begin_inset space ~
32721 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32724 always refers to the first occurrence of
32725 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32728 in all entered regexps.
32736 \begin_layout Section
32738 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32740 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32745 \begin_inset Index idx
32748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32757 \begin_layout Standard
32759 has a built-in spell checker.
32762 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32769 key or the toolbar button
32772 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32775 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32776 beginning of the currently selected text.
32777 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32778 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32779 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32780 scrolled so that it is visible.
32781 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32782 n, if any could be found.
32783 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32787 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32788 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32791 \begin_layout Standard
32792 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32795 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32799 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32800 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32802 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32803 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32806 \begin_inset space ~
32814 arg "dialog-show character"
32817 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32819 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32822 \begin_layout Standard
32823 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32824 can be downloaded from here:
32825 \begin_inset Newline newline
32829 \begin_inset Flex URL
32832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32834 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32840 \begin_inset Newline newline
32844 \begin_inset space ~
32847 files for each language.
32848 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32849 \begin_inset space ~
32852 files into \SpecialChar LyX
32853 's installation subfolder
32861 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
32863 \begin_inset Newline newline
32866 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32867 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32868 but in most cases these are
32884 is the language code.
32887 \begin_layout Subsection
32891 \begin_layout Standard
32894 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32895 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32897 \begin_inset space ~
32900 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32903 you can set the following things:
32906 \begin_layout Description
32908 \begin_inset space ~
32911 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
32912 should use for spell checking.
32913 Depending on your platform,
32927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32928 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32929 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32944 \begin_inset space ~
32947 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
32950 \begin_layout Description
32952 \begin_inset space ~
32955 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
32956 will always use the given language
32957 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32960 \begin_layout Description
32962 \begin_inset space ~
32965 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32967 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32971 \begin_inset space \space{}
32975 This should normally not be needed.
32978 \begin_layout Description
32980 \begin_inset space ~
32984 \begin_inset space ~
32987 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32993 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32999 \begin_layout Description
33001 \begin_inset space ~
33004 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
33005 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
33006 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
33007 appear in a context menu.
33008 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
33012 \begin_layout Description
33014 \begin_inset space ~
33018 \begin_inset space ~
33022 \begin_inset space ~
33025 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
33029 \begin_layout Section
33031 \begin_inset Index idx
33034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33041 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33043 name "sec:Thesaurus"
33050 \begin_layout Standard
33052 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
33053 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
33062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33063 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33065 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
33074 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
33076 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
33077 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
33078 which are available for many languages.
33081 \begin_layout Standard
33082 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
33083 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
33087 \begin_layout Subsection
33088 Setting up the thesaurus
33091 \begin_layout Standard
33100 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
33104 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
33109 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
33111 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33115 \begin_inset space ~
33123 For instance, the US English files are named:
33126 \begin_layout Itemize
33130 \begin_layout Itemize
33134 \begin_layout Standard
33143 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33144 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
33147 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33148 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33149 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33151 \begin_inset space ~
33156 ) to the path where they are installed.
33160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33161 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33162 ies, typical locations are
33168 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33172 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33176 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33179 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33185 LibreOffice-<Version>
33192 On the Mac, the default location is
33194 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
33195 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33196 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
33197 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
33198 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33199 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33207 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33208 during the \SpecialChar LyX
33209 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
33213 \begin_layout Standard
33214 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
33215 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33219 \begin_layout Itemize
33220 \begin_inset Flex URL
33223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33225 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33233 \begin_layout Standard
33234 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33235 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33237 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33238 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33239 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33241 \begin_inset space ~
33246 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33248 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33249 and point \SpecialChar LyX
33253 \begin_layout Standard
33254 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33256 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33259 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33265 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33268 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
33269 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33271 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33277 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33278 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33279 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33281 \begin_inset space ~
33286 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33289 \begin_layout Subsection
33290 Using the thesaurus
33293 \begin_layout Standard
33294 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33296 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33299 or the toolbar button
33302 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33305 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33307 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33309 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33310 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33311 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33320 ), related terms (such as
33323 \begin_inset space ~
33332 ), compounds (such as
33335 \begin_inset space ~
33344 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33353 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33356 \begin_layout Standard
33357 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33358 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33362 \begin_layout Standard
33363 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33364 the dictionary, such as the above
33368 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33369 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33373 \begin_inset space \space{}
33376 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33377 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33378 For example, looking up the word form
33382 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33387 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33388 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33392 \begin_inset space \space{}
33403 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33404 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33405 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33408 \begin_layout Section
33410 \begin_inset Index idx
33413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33420 \begin_inset Index idx
33423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33424 Document ! Change Tracking
33430 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33432 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33439 \begin_layout Standard
33440 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33441 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33442 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33443 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33445 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33447 \begin_inset space ~
33450 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33452 \begin_inset space ~
33460 \begin_layout Standard
33461 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33475 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33476 You can change the color in
33478 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33479 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33481 \begin_inset space ~
33485 \begin_inset space ~
33490 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33496 \begin_inset Index idx
33499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33500 Color ! Change tracking
33505 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
33506 's status bar when the
33507 cursor is in changed text.
33508 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33511 arg "changes-merge"
33517 \begin_layout Standard
33518 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
33520 \begin_inset Index idx
33523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33532 \begin_layout Standard
33533 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33539 \begin_layout Standard
33540 \begin_inset Graphics
33541 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33549 \begin_layout Standard
33550 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33556 \begin_layout Standard
33557 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33560 \begin_layout Standard
33561 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33567 \begin_layout Standard
33568 \begin_inset Tabular
33569 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33570 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33571 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33572 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33573 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33582 arg "changes-track"
33590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33596 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33598 \begin_inset space ~
33601 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33603 \begin_inset space ~
33612 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33621 arg "changes-output"
33629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33635 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33637 \begin_inset space ~
33640 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33642 \begin_inset space ~
33646 \begin_inset space ~
33650 \begin_inset space ~
33659 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33680 Jumps to the next change
33686 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33695 arg "change-accept"
33703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33709 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33711 \begin_inset space ~
33714 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33716 \begin_inset space ~
33725 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33734 arg "change-reject"
33742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33748 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33750 \begin_inset space ~
33753 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33755 \begin_inset space ~
33764 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33773 arg "changes-merge"
33781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33787 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33789 \begin_inset space ~
33792 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33794 \begin_inset space ~
33803 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33812 arg "all-changes-accept"
33820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33826 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33828 \begin_inset space ~
33831 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33833 \begin_inset space ~
33837 \begin_inset space ~
33846 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33855 arg "all-changes-reject"
33863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33869 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33871 \begin_inset space ~
33874 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33876 \begin_inset space ~
33880 \begin_inset space ~
33889 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33912 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33913 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
33915 \begin_inset space ~
33924 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33947 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
33949 \begin_inset space ~
33965 \begin_layout Standard
33966 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33972 \begin_layout Standard
33973 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33993 \begin_layout Standard
33994 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33995 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33996 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33997 the next change after the current cursor position.
33998 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
33999 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
34000 step to the next change.
34001 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
34004 \begin_layout Standard
34005 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
34006 to describe a change.
34009 \begin_layout Standard
34010 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34016 \begin_inset Index idx
34019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34021 -packages ! dvipost
34027 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34029 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34035 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34039 \begin_layout Section
34040 Comparison of Documents
34041 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34043 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
34048 \begin_inset Index idx
34051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34052 Comparison of documents
34060 \begin_layout Standard
34061 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
34064 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34068 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
34069 file with change tracking enabled showing the
34071 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
34073 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
34077 \begin_inset space ~
34081 \begin_inset space ~
34085 \begin_inset space ~
34094 \begin_inset space ~
34098 \begin_inset space ~
34102 \begin_inset space ~
34106 \begin_inset space ~
34110 \begin_inset space ~
34114 \begin_inset space ~
34119 enables the change tracking option
34122 \begin_inset space ~
34126 \begin_inset space ~
34130 \begin_inset space ~
34135 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34138 \begin_layout Section
34139 International Support
34140 \begin_inset Index idx
34143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34144 International support
34152 \begin_layout Standard
34153 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
34154 with any language you want.
34155 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34156 up \SpecialChar LyX
34158 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34160 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34167 \begin_layout Standard
34168 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
34169 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34170 \begin_inset space ~
34174 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34176 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
34183 \begin_layout Subsection
34185 \begin_inset Index idx
34188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34195 \begin_inset Index idx
34198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34199 Document ! Settings
34205 \begin_inset Index idx
34208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34209 Document ! Language
34217 \begin_layout Standard
34220 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34221 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34224 dialog lets you set
34226 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34231 \begin_layout Standard
34236 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
34241 \begin_inset space ~
34246 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34247 For details about the different encoding options see section
34248 \begin_inset space ~
34252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34254 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34261 \begin_layout Subsection
34262 Keyboard mapping configuration
34263 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34265 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
34272 \begin_layout Standard
34273 If you have for example a U.
34274 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34277 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34278 can use an alternate keymap.
34279 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
34284 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34285 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34286 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
34289 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34290 \begin_inset space ~
34294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34296 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
34301 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34302 which one you want to use.
34305 \begin_layout Standard
34306 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34307 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34308 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34309 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34312 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34313 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34314 one to support the characters you want.
34315 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34322 \begin_layout Chapter
34325 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34327 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34334 \begin_layout Standard
34335 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34336 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34337 topic inside the user's guide.
34340 \begin_layout Section
34342 \begin_inset Index idx
34345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34354 \begin_layout Standard
34359 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34362 \begin_layout Subsection
34366 \begin_layout Standard
34367 Creates a new document.
34370 \begin_layout Subsection
34374 \begin_layout Standard
34375 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34376 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34377 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34380 \begin_layout Subsection
34384 \begin_layout Standard
34388 \begin_layout Subsection
34392 \begin_layout Standard
34393 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34394 Click there on a file to open it.
34397 \begin_layout Subsection
34401 \begin_layout Standard
34402 Closes the current document.
34405 \begin_layout Subsection
34409 \begin_layout Standard
34410 Closes all opened documents.
34413 \begin_layout Subsection
34417 \begin_layout Standard
34418 Saves the actual document.
34421 \begin_layout Subsection
34425 \begin_layout Standard
34426 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34429 \begin_layout Subsection
34433 \begin_layout Standard
34434 Saves all opened documents.
34437 \begin_layout Subsection
34441 \begin_layout Standard
34442 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34445 \begin_layout Subsection
34449 \begin_layout Standard
34450 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34451 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34452 It is described in the section
34454 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
34459 Additional Features
34464 \begin_layout Subsection
34468 \begin_layout Standard
34469 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
34470 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
34472 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
34473 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
34477 \begin_layout Standard
34478 When using the menu entry
34481 \begin_inset space ~
34486 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34490 \begin_inset space ~
34494 \begin_inset space ~
34498 \begin_inset space ~
34503 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34504 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34507 \begin_layout Subsection
34509 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34511 name "subsec:Export"
34518 \begin_layout Standard
34519 You can export your document to various file formats.
34520 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
34522 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34523 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
34524 during its configuration.
34527 \begin_layout Standard
34528 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34530 \begin_inset space ~
34534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34536 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
34543 \begin_layout Description
34549 \begin_inset space ~
34552 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
34554 \begin_inset space ~
34557 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34558 \begin_inset Newline newline
34561 Since \SpecialChar LyX
34562 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
34566 \begin_layout Description
34567 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34573 \begin_layout Description
34575 \begin_inset space ~
34578 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34584 \begin_layout Description
34585 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
34586 's native DVI-format.
34587 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34588 files paths or file names in your document.
34590 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34597 \begin_layout Description
34598 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34599 in files paths or file names
34602 \begin_layout Description
34604 \begin_inset space ~
34611 ) DVI-format using the program
34613 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34616 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
34620 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34628 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34636 \begin_layout Description
34638 \begin_inset space ~
34641 (cropped) the same as
34645 but with cropped page margins.
34648 \begin_layout Description
34650 \begin_inset space ~
34653 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34657 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34662 \begin_layout Description
34666 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34674 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
34682 \begin_layout Description
34684 \begin_inset space ~
34688 \begin_inset space ~
34691 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34695 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34703 \begin_layout Description
34707 \begin_inset space ~
34716 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34717 source that is compilable with the program
34719 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34723 \begin_layout Description
34727 \begin_inset space ~
34732 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34733 source, additionally all images used in the document
34734 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34738 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34741 \begin_layout Description
34745 \begin_inset space ~
34750 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34751 source code, additionally all images used in the document
34752 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
34760 \begin_layout Description
34764 \begin_inset space ~
34773 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34774 source that is compilable with the program
34780 \begin_layout Description
34782 \begin_inset space ~
34786 \begin_inset space ~
34793 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34794 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
34800 \begin_layout Description
34802 \begin_inset space ~
34805 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
34806 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
34808 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34812 \begin_inset space \space{}
34817 \begin_inset space ~
34821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34836 represent the version number)
34839 \begin_layout Description
34841 \begin_inset space ~
34845 \begin_inset space ~
34848 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34849 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34850 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34854 \begin_layout Description
34855 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
34856 's internal XHTML engine
34859 \begin_layout Description
34860 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34865 \begin_layout Description
34866 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
34868 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34871 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
34875 \begin_layout Description
34877 \begin_inset space ~
34880 (cropped) the same as
34883 \begin_inset space ~
34888 but with cropped page margins
34891 \begin_layout Description
34895 \begin_inset space ~
34900 PDF-format using the program
34904 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34907 \begin_layout Description
34911 \begin_inset space ~
34915 \begin_inset space ~
34923 \begin_inset space ~
34928 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
34929 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34933 \begin_inset space \space{}
34936 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
34940 \begin_layout Description
34944 \begin_inset space ~
34949 PDF-format using the program
34951 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34954 , produces PDF-files directly
34957 \begin_layout Description
34961 \begin_inset space ~
34966 PDF-format using the program
34970 , produces PDF-files directly
34973 \begin_layout Description
34977 \begin_inset space ~
34982 PDF-format using the program
34986 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34989 \begin_layout Description
34993 \begin_inset space ~
34998 PDF-format using the program
35003 , produces PDF-files directly
35006 \begin_layout Description
35010 \begin_inset space ~
35018 \begin_layout Description
35022 \begin_inset space ~
35026 \begin_inset space ~
35031 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
35032 and then exported as text using the program
35037 \begin_layout Description
35042 PostScript format using the program
35047 \begin_layout Description
35048 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35049 source and also code in the statistical programming
35063 it is possible to use
35067 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
35071 \begin_layout Standard
35072 If one of the menu entries
35079 \begin_inset space ~
35088 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35090 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
35092 \begin_inset space ~
35096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35098 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35103 \begin_inset Index idx
35106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35107 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
35116 \begin_layout Subsection
35120 \begin_layout Standard
35121 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35122 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
35125 \begin_inset space ~
35129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35131 reference "sec:Paths"
35136 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35145 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35146 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
35147 's preferences as described in section
35148 \begin_inset space ~
35152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35154 reference "subsec:Converters"
35161 \begin_layout Subsection
35162 New and Close Window
35165 \begin_layout Standard
35166 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
35170 \begin_layout Subsection
35174 \begin_layout Standard
35175 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35178 \begin_layout Section
35180 \begin_inset Index idx
35183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35192 \begin_layout Subsection
35196 \begin_layout Standard
35197 Described in section
35198 \begin_inset space ~
35202 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35204 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35211 \begin_layout Subsection
35212 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35215 \begin_layout Standard
35216 Described in section
35217 \begin_inset space ~
35221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35223 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35230 \begin_layout Subsection
35234 \begin_layout Standard
35235 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35236 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35239 \begin_layout Subsection
35243 \begin_layout Standard
35244 Selects the whole document.
35247 \begin_layout Subsection
35248 Find & Replace (Quick)
35251 \begin_layout Standard
35252 Described in section
35253 \begin_inset space ~
35257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35259 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35266 \begin_layout Subsection
35267 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35270 \begin_layout Standard
35271 Described in section
35272 \begin_inset space ~
35276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35278 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35285 \begin_layout Subsection
35286 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35289 \begin_layout Standard
35290 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35294 \begin_layout Subsection
35298 \begin_layout Standard
35299 Described in section
35300 \begin_inset space ~
35304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35306 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35313 \begin_layout Subsection
35315 \begin_inset Index idx
35318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35319 Paragraph ! Settings
35327 \begin_layout Standard
35328 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35329 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35333 \begin_layout Standard
35334 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35335 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35341 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35342 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35344 \begin_inset space ~
35352 \begin_layout Subsection
35356 \begin_layout Standard
35357 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
35358 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35359 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
35363 \begin_layout Standard
35364 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
35366 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
35367 The properties of tables are described in section
35368 \begin_inset space ~
35372 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35374 reference "sec:Tables"
35378 , the properties of formulas in chapter
35379 \begin_inset space ~
35383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35385 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35392 \begin_layout Subsection
35393 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35396 \begin_layout Standard
35397 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35399 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35400 \begin_inset space ~
35404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35406 reference "sec:Nesting"
35411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35413 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
35420 \begin_layout Subsection
35423 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35426 \begin_layout Standard
35427 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35428 nts of the same type.
35430 \begin_inset space ~
35434 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35436 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
35440 for an explanation.
35443 \begin_layout Section
35445 \begin_inset Index idx
35448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35457 \begin_layout Standard
35458 At the bottom of the
35462 menu the opened documents are listed.
35465 \begin_layout Subsection
35466 Open/Close all Insets
35469 \begin_layout Standard
35470 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35473 \begin_layout Subsection
35474 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35477 \begin_layout Standard
35478 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35481 \begin_layout Standard
35482 Math macros are described in the
35489 \begin_layout Subsection
35493 \begin_layout Standard
35494 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35495 \begin_inset space ~
35499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35501 reference "sec:Navigating"
35506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35508 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
35515 \begin_layout Subsection
35519 \begin_layout Standard
35520 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35522 \begin_inset space ~
35526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35528 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35535 \begin_layout Subsection
35539 \begin_layout Standard
35540 Opens a window showing console messages.
35541 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
35543 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35546 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35547 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
35548 is processing the document.
35551 \begin_layout Subsection
35553 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35555 name "subsec:Toolbars"
35560 \begin_inset Index idx
35563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35572 \begin_layout Standard
35573 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35574 All toolbars and the
35577 \begin_inset space ~
35582 can be turned on and off.
35587 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35599 \begin_inset space ~
35611 \begin_inset space ~
35616 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35620 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35627 \begin_layout Standard
35632 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35636 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35637 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35638 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35639 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35640 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35643 \begin_layout Standard
35645 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35646 \begin_inset space ~
35650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35652 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35659 \begin_layout Subsection
35663 \begin_layout Standard
35667 \begin_inset space ~
35671 \begin_inset space ~
35675 \begin_inset space ~
35679 \begin_inset space ~
35683 \begin_inset space ~
35687 \begin_inset space ~
35692 will split \SpecialChar LyX
35693 's main window vertically while
35696 \begin_inset space ~
35700 \begin_inset space ~
35704 \begin_inset space ~
35708 \begin_inset space ~
35712 \begin_inset space ~
35716 \begin_inset space ~
35721 will split it horizontally.
35722 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35723 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35724 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35725 three or more documents at the same time.
35726 To close a split view, use the menu
35729 \begin_inset space ~
35733 \begin_inset space ~
35741 \begin_layout Subsection
35745 \begin_layout Standard
35746 Closes a split view.
35749 \begin_layout Subsection
35753 \begin_layout Standard
35754 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35755 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35756 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
35757 's main window fullscreen.
35758 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35759 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35762 \begin_layout Section
35764 \begin_inset Index idx
35767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35776 \begin_layout Subsection
35780 \begin_layout Standard
35781 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35782 \begin_inset space ~
35786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35788 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35799 \begin_layout Subsection
35801 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35803 name "subsec:Special-Character"
35810 \begin_layout Standard
35811 Here you can insert the following characters:
35814 \begin_layout Description
35819 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35822 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35823 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35824 -packages you have installed.
35825 You can get a complete display by checking
35828 \begin_inset space ~
35834 \begin_inset Newline newline
35838 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35846 Not all characters will be visible in the
35850 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35852 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35856 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35858 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
35862 ) can display every character.
35870 \begin_layout Description
35871 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
35875 \begin_layout Description
35877 \begin_inset space ~
35881 \begin_inset space ~
35884 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35885 \begin_inset space ~
35889 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35891 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
35898 \begin_layout Description
35900 \begin_inset space ~
35903 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35906 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35907 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35913 \begin_layout Description
35915 \begin_inset space ~
35918 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35921 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35922 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35928 \begin_layout Description
35930 \begin_inset space ~
35933 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
35937 \begin_layout Description
35939 \begin_inset space ~
35942 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
35946 \begin_layout Description
35948 \begin_inset space ~
35951 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
35957 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35963 \begin_layout Description
35965 \begin_inset space ~
35968 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
35972 \begin_layout Description
35974 \begin_inset space ~
35978 \begin_inset Index idx
35981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35988 \begin_inset Index idx
35991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35992 Language ! Phonetic symbols
35997 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
35998 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
36000 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36006 \begin_inset Index idx
36009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36017 \begin_inset Newline newline
36020 More information about this feature can be found in the
36026 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
36032 \begin_layout Subsection
36036 \begin_layout Standard
36037 Opens a submenu with the following options:
36040 \begin_layout Description
36041 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
36042 \begin_inset script superscript
36044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36053 \begin_layout Description
36054 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
36055 \begin_inset script subscript
36057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36066 \begin_layout Description
36068 \begin_inset space ~
36071 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
36072 \begin_inset space ~
36076 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36078 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
36085 \begin_layout Description
36087 \begin_inset space ~
36090 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36091 \begin_inset space ~
36095 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36097 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
36104 \begin_layout Description
36106 \begin_inset space ~
36109 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36110 \begin_inset space ~
36114 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36116 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
36123 \begin_layout Description
36125 \begin_inset space ~
36128 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36130 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36134 \begin_inset space \space{}
36137 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36138 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
36144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36147 To insert a fraction use the command
36152 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36156 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36165 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36172 \begin_layout Description
36174 \begin_inset space ~
36177 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36178 \begin_inset space ~
36182 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36184 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
36191 \begin_layout Description
36193 \begin_inset space ~
36196 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36197 \begin_inset space ~
36201 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36203 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
36210 \begin_layout Description
36212 \begin_inset space ~
36215 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36216 \begin_inset space ~
36220 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36222 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
36229 \begin_layout Description
36230 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36231 \begin_inset space ~
36235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36237 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
36244 \begin_layout Description
36246 \begin_inset space ~
36249 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36250 \begin_inset space ~
36254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36256 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
36263 \begin_layout Description
36265 \begin_inset space ~
36268 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36269 \begin_inset space ~
36273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36275 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
36282 \begin_layout Description
36284 \begin_inset space ~
36288 \begin_inset space ~
36291 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36292 \begin_inset space ~
36296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36298 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36305 \begin_layout Description
36307 \begin_inset space ~
36310 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36311 as described in section
36312 \begin_inset space ~
36316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36318 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36325 \begin_layout Description
36327 \begin_inset space ~
36330 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36331 \begin_inset space ~
36335 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36337 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36344 \begin_layout Description
36346 \begin_inset space ~
36349 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36350 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36352 \begin_inset space ~
36356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36358 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36365 \begin_layout Description
36367 \begin_inset space ~
36370 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36371 \begin_inset space ~
36375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36377 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36384 \begin_layout Description
36386 \begin_inset space ~
36390 \begin_inset space ~
36393 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36394 \begin_inset space ~
36398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36400 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36407 \begin_layout Subsection
36411 \begin_layout Standard
36412 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36416 \begin_inset space ~
36437 are described in section
36438 \begin_inset space ~
36442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36444 reference "sec:toc"
36453 is described in section
36454 \begin_inset space ~
36458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36460 reference "sec:Index"
36468 is described in section
36469 \begin_inset space ~
36473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36475 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36481 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36484 is described in section
36485 \begin_inset space ~
36489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36491 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36498 \begin_layout Subsection
36502 \begin_layout Standard
36503 To insert floats, as described in section
36504 \begin_inset space ~
36508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36510 reference "sec:Floats"
36514 and in detail the chapter
36521 \begin_inset space ~
36529 \begin_layout Subsection
36533 \begin_layout Standard
36534 To insert notes, described in section
36535 \begin_inset space ~
36539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36541 reference "sec:Notes"
36548 \begin_layout Subsection
36552 \begin_layout Standard
36553 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36555 Branches are described in section
36556 \begin_inset space ~
36560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36562 reference "sec:Branches"
36569 \begin_layout Subsection
36573 \begin_layout Standard
36574 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36575 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36577 An example is the document class
36578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36585 with three custom insets.
36588 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36592 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36598 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36601 \begin_layout Subsection
36603 \begin_inset Index idx
36606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36615 \begin_layout Standard
36616 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36618 For more information see chapter
36620 External Document Parts
36623 \begin_inset space ~
36629 \begin_layout Subsection
36631 \begin_inset Index idx
36634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36643 \begin_layout Standard
36644 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36645 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36652 \begin_inset space ~
36660 \begin_layout Subsection
36664 \begin_layout Standard
36669 dialog as described in section
36670 \begin_inset space ~
36674 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36676 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36683 \begin_layout Subsection
36687 \begin_layout Standard
36692 as described in section
36693 \begin_inset space ~
36697 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36699 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36706 \begin_layout Subsection
36710 \begin_layout Standard
36715 as described in section
36716 \begin_inset space ~
36720 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36722 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36729 \begin_layout Subsection
36731 \begin_inset Index idx
36734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36741 \begin_inset Index idx
36744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36745 Longtables ! Caption
36753 \begin_layout Standard
36754 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36755 Floats are described in section
36756 \begin_inset space ~
36760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36762 reference "sec:Floats"
36766 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36773 \begin_inset space ~
36781 \begin_layout Subsection
36785 \begin_layout Standard
36786 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36787 \begin_inset space ~
36791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36793 reference "sec:Index"
36800 \begin_layout Subsection
36804 \begin_layout Standard
36805 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36806 \begin_inset space ~
36810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36812 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36819 \begin_layout Subsection
36823 \begin_layout Standard
36824 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36825 Tables are described in section
36826 \begin_inset space ~
36830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36832 reference "sec:Tables"
36836 and in detail in the chapter
36843 \begin_inset space ~
36851 \begin_layout Subsection
36855 \begin_layout Standard
36861 Graphics are described in section
36862 \begin_inset space ~
36866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36868 reference "sec:Graphics"
36875 \begin_layout Subsection
36879 \begin_layout Standard
36880 Inserts a URL as described in section
36881 \begin_inset space ~
36885 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36887 reference "subsec:URLs"
36894 \begin_layout Subsection
36898 \begin_layout Standard
36899 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36900 \begin_inset space ~
36904 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36906 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
36913 \begin_layout Subsection
36917 \begin_layout Standard
36918 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36919 \begin_inset space ~
36923 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36925 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36932 \begin_layout Subsection
36936 \begin_layout Standard
36937 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36938 \begin_inset space ~
36942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36944 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36951 \begin_layout Subsection
36955 \begin_layout Standard
36956 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
36957 title or caption of a float.
36958 Inserts a short title as described in section
36959 \begin_inset space ~
36963 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36965 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
36972 \begin_layout Subsection
36977 \begin_layout Standard
36978 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
36979 Code box as described in section
36980 \begin_inset space ~
36984 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36986 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36993 \begin_layout Subsection
36995 \begin_inset Index idx
36998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37007 \begin_layout Standard
37008 Inserts a program listings box.
37009 Program listings are explained in the chapter
37011 Program Code Listings
37016 \begin_inset space ~
37024 \begin_layout Subsection
37028 \begin_layout Standard
37029 Inserts the actual date.
37030 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
37034 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
37042 \begin_inset space ~
37050 \begin_layout Subsection
37054 \begin_layout Standard
37055 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
37056 \begin_inset space ~
37060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37062 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37069 \begin_layout Section
37071 \begin_inset Index idx
37074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37083 \begin_layout Standard
37084 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
37085 \begin_inset space ~
37088 of the current document.
37089 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37092 \begin_layout Subsection
37096 \begin_layout Standard
37097 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37098 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37099 to jump, for example, between section
37100 \begin_inset space ~
37104 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37105 \begin_inset space ~
37108 2.5 and use the submenu
37111 \begin_inset space ~
37115 \begin_inset space ~
37122 \begin_inset space ~
37128 \begin_inset space ~
37132 \begin_inset space ~
37138 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37142 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37148 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37151 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37154 \begin_layout Standard
37155 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37159 \begin_inset space ~
37164 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37167 \begin_inset space ~
37172 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37175 \begin_layout Subsection
37176 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37179 \begin_layout Standard
37180 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37184 \begin_layout Subsection
37188 \begin_layout Standard
37189 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37190 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37191 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37195 \begin_inset space ~
37199 \begin_inset space ~
37207 \begin_layout Subsection
37211 \begin_layout Standard
37212 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37215 The \SpecialChar LyX
37216 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
37218 \begin_inset space ~
37226 \begin_inset space ~
37231 manual for a detailed description.
37234 \begin_layout Section
37236 \begin_inset Index idx
37239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37248 \begin_layout Subsection
37252 \begin_layout Standard
37253 Change Tracking is described in section
37254 \begin_inset space ~
37258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37260 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37267 \begin_layout Subsection
37275 \begin_layout Standard
37276 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
37277 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
37278 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37280 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37281 to the clipboard or update the view.
37282 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37286 \begin_layout Subsection
37287 Start Appendix Here
37290 \begin_layout Standard
37291 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37292 as described in section
37293 \begin_inset space ~
37297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37299 reference "sec:Appendices"
37306 \begin_layout Subsection
37308 \begin_inset space ~
37314 \begin_layout Standard
37315 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37316 default output format for the document (menu
37318 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37319 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37320 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37322 \begin_inset space ~
37326 \begin_inset space ~
37332 \begin_inset space ~
37336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37338 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37342 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
37345 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37346 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37348 \begin_inset space ~
37351 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37353 \begin_inset space ~
37356 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37358 \begin_inset space ~
37362 \begin_inset space ~
37368 \begin_inset space ~
37372 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37374 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37378 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37379 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37381 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37382 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37384 \begin_inset space ~
37387 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37389 \begin_inset space ~
37392 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37396 \begin_inset space ~
37400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37402 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37407 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37408 when it is first configured.
37409 The default output format is
37412 \begin_inset space ~
37420 \begin_layout Subsection
37421 View (Other Formats)
37424 \begin_layout Standard
37425 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37426 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37427 actual document with an external program.
37428 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37429 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37430 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
37432 All possible formats are listed in section
37433 \begin_inset space ~
37437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37439 reference "subsec:Export"
37444 You should at least see the menu entry
37449 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37451 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37453 \begin_inset space ~
37457 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37459 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37464 \begin_inset Index idx
37467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37468 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37477 \begin_layout Standard
37478 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37479 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37481 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37482 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37484 \begin_inset space ~
37487 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37489 \begin_inset space ~
37492 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37496 \begin_inset space ~
37500 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37502 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37507 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37508 when it is first configured.
37511 \begin_layout Subsection
37513 \begin_inset space ~
37519 \begin_layout Standard
37520 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37521 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37524 \begin_layout Subsection
37525 Update (Other Formats)
37528 \begin_layout Standard
37529 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37530 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37533 \begin_layout Subsection
37534 View Master Document
37537 \begin_layout Standard
37538 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37554 \begin_inset space ~
37559 manual for more information on this topic).
37560 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37561 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37565 \begin_inset space ~
37569 \begin_inset space ~
37574 generates the output of the whole book, while
37578 will just output the chapter alone.
37581 \begin_layout Standard
37582 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37583 in the document settings (menu
37585 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37586 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37587 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37589 \begin_inset space ~
37593 \begin_inset space ~
37599 \begin_inset space ~
37603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37605 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37609 ) or in the preferences (menu
37611 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37612 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37614 \begin_inset space ~
37617 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37619 \begin_inset space ~
37622 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37624 \begin_inset space ~
37628 \begin_inset space ~
37634 \begin_inset space ~
37638 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37640 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37647 \begin_layout Subsection
37648 Update Master Document
37651 \begin_layout Standard
37652 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37668 \begin_inset space ~
37673 manual for more information on this topic).
37674 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37675 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37678 \begin_layout Standard
37679 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37680 in the document settings (menu
37682 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37683 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37684 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37686 \begin_inset space ~
37690 \begin_inset space ~
37696 \begin_inset space ~
37700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37702 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37706 ) or in the preferences (menu
37708 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37709 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37711 \begin_inset space ~
37714 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37716 \begin_inset space ~
37719 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37721 \begin_inset space ~
37725 \begin_inset space ~
37731 \begin_inset space ~
37735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37737 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37744 \begin_layout Subsection
37746 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37748 name "subsec:Compressed"
37755 \begin_layout Standard
37756 Un/compresses the current document.
37757 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
37758 compression (see the
37760 Additional Features
37762 manual for details).
37765 \begin_layout Subsection
37769 \begin_layout Standard
37770 The document settings are described in appendix
37771 \begin_inset space ~
37775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37777 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37784 \begin_layout Section
37786 \begin_inset Index idx
37789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37798 \begin_layout Subsection
37802 \begin_layout Standard
37803 Spell checking is explained in section
37804 \begin_inset space ~
37808 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37810 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37817 \begin_layout Subsection
37821 \begin_layout Standard
37822 The thesaurus is described in section
37823 \begin_inset space ~
37827 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37829 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37836 \begin_layout Subsection
37838 \begin_inset Index idx
37841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37848 \begin_inset Index idx
37851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37860 \begin_layout Standard
37861 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37862 the highlighted document part.
37865 \begin_layout Subsection
37871 \begin_inset Index idx
37874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37875 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
37884 \begin_layout Standard
37885 Generates with the help of the program
37887 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
37890 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
37891 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
37892 This feature is not available on Windows.
37895 \begin_layout Subsection
37901 \begin_inset Index idx
37904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37914 \begin_layout Standard
37915 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37920 \begin_inset space ~
37925 to see the full filename paths.
37928 \begin_layout Subsection
37930 \begin_inset Index idx
37933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37942 \begin_layout Standard
37943 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
37944 files as described in section
37945 \begin_inset space ~
37949 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37951 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37958 \begin_layout Subsection
37960 \begin_inset Index idx
37963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37976 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37994 \begin_inset Index idx
37997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37998 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38007 \begin_layout Standard
38008 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
38009 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
38010 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38011 -packages and programs it needs; see
38013 \begin_inset space ~
38017 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38019 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38026 \begin_layout Subsection
38030 \begin_layout Standard
38035 dialog as described in detail in appendix
38036 \begin_inset space ~
38040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38042 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
38049 \begin_layout Section
38051 \begin_inset Index idx
38054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38063 \begin_layout Standard
38064 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
38065 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
38067 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
38071 \begin_layout Standard
38075 \begin_inset space ~
38080 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
38081 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38082 packages and classes found
38083 by \SpecialChar LyX
38085 \begin_inset space ~
38089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38091 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38098 \begin_layout Standard
38102 \begin_inset space ~
38107 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
38112 \begin_layout Section
38114 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38116 name "sec:Toolbars"
38123 \begin_layout Standard
38124 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38125 \begin_inset space ~
38129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38131 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
38138 \begin_layout Standard
38139 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38140 This is described in the
38142 Additional Features
38147 \begin_layout Subsection
38149 \begin_inset Index idx
38152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38161 \begin_layout Standard
38162 \begin_inset Graphics
38163 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38171 \begin_layout Standard
38172 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38178 \begin_layout Standard
38179 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38196 \begin_inset Note Note
38199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38200 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38205 manual for more information.
38213 \begin_layout Standard
38214 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38220 \begin_layout Standard
38221 \begin_inset Tabular
38222 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38223 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38224 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38225 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38231 \begin_inset Graphics
38232 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38246 pull-down box for the environments
38259 \begin_layout Standard
38260 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38266 \begin_layout Standard
38268 \begin_inset Tabular
38269 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38270 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38271 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38272 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38273 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38296 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38303 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38326 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38333 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38356 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38363 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38372 arg "dialog-show print"
38380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38386 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38393 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38402 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38416 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38423 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38446 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38453 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38476 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38483 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38506 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38513 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38536 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38543 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38566 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38573 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38582 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38596 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38598 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38602 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38606 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38615 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38622 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38636 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38638 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38642 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38646 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38655 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38664 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38678 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38679 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
38686 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38707 Emphasize text, function of the
38709 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38711 \begin_inset space ~
38714 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38723 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38744 Set text to noun style, function of the
38746 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38748 \begin_inset space ~
38751 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38760 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38769 arg "textstyle-apply"
38777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38781 Format text using the current settings in the
38783 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38785 \begin_inset space ~
38788 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38797 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38820 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38821 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
38823 \begin_inset space ~
38832 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38841 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38855 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38862 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38869 arg "tabular-insert"
38877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38883 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38890 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38899 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38911 Toggle outline window on/off,
38913 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
38920 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38929 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38941 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38947 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38956 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
38964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38968 Toggle table toolbar on/off
38981 \begin_layout Subsection
38983 \begin_inset Index idx
38986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38995 \begin_layout Standard
38996 \begin_inset Graphics
38997 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
39005 \begin_layout Standard
39006 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39012 \begin_layout Standard
39013 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39017 \begin_layout Standard
39018 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39024 \begin_layout Standard
39025 \begin_inset Tabular
39026 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
39027 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39028 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39029 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39030 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39057 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39066 arg "layout Enumerate"
39074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39084 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39093 arg "layout Itemize"
39101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39111 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39138 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39147 arg "layout Description"
39155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39165 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39174 arg "depth-increment"
39182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39188 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39190 \begin_inset space ~
39194 \begin_inset space ~
39203 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39212 arg "depth-decrement"
39220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39226 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39228 \begin_inset space ~
39232 \begin_inset space ~
39241 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39250 arg "float-insert figure"
39258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39264 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39265 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39272 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39281 arg "float-insert table"
39289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39295 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39296 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39303 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39326 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39333 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39342 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39356 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39363 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39372 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39386 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39393 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39416 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39418 \begin_inset space ~
39427 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39436 arg "nomencl-insert"
39444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39450 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39452 \begin_inset space ~
39461 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39470 arg "footnote-insert"
39478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39484 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39491 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39500 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39514 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39516 \begin_inset space ~
39525 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39548 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39549 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39551 \begin_inset space ~
39560 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39569 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39583 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39590 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39613 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39620 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39643 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39645 \begin_inset space ~
39654 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39663 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39677 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39678 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39685 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39694 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39708 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39709 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39711 \begin_inset space ~
39720 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39729 arg "dialog-show character"
39737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39743 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39745 \begin_inset space ~
39748 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39755 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39764 arg "layout-paragraph"
39772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39778 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39780 \begin_inset space ~
39789 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39798 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39812 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39826 \begin_layout Subsection
39827 View/Update Toolbar
39828 \begin_inset Index idx
39831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39832 Toolbar ! View / Update
39840 \begin_layout Standard
39841 \begin_inset Graphics
39842 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39849 \begin_layout Standard
39850 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39856 \begin_layout Standard
39857 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39861 \begin_layout Standard
39862 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39868 \begin_layout Standard
39869 \begin_inset Tabular
39870 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39871 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39872 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39873 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39874 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39897 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39904 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39913 arg "buffer-update"
39921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39927 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39934 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39943 arg "master-buffer-view"
39951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39957 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39959 \begin_inset space ~
39968 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39977 arg "master-buffer-update"
39985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39991 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39993 \begin_inset space ~
39997 \begin_inset space ~
40006 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40015 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
40023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40029 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40030 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40031 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40032 Synchronize with Output
40038 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40043 \begin_inset Graphics
40044 filename ../images/view-others.svgz
40047 groupId toolbarbuttons
40058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40064 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40065 View (Other Formats)
40071 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40076 \begin_inset Graphics
40077 filename ../images/update-others.svgz
40080 groupId toolbarbuttons
40089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40095 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40096 Update (Other Formats)
40109 \begin_layout Standard
40110 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40114 \begin_layout Subsection
40118 \begin_layout Standard
40119 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40120 \begin_inset space ~
40124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40126 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40130 , the table toolbar
40131 \begin_inset Index idx
40134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40143 \begin_inset space ~
40148 manual and the math macro toolbar
40149 \begin_inset Index idx
40152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40165 \begin_layout Chapter
40166 The Document Settings
40167 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40169 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40174 \begin_inset Index idx
40177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40178 Document ! Settings
40186 \begin_layout Standard
40190 \begin_inset space ~
40195 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40196 is called with the menu
40198 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40202 You can save your document settings as default with the
40204 Save as Document Defaults
40206 button in any dialog.
40207 This will create a template named
40211 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
40212 when you create a new document without
40216 \begin_layout Standard
40221 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40222 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40225 \begin_layout Standard
40226 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40227 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40228 to find the one you are looking for.
40229 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40230 the submenus of the dialog.
40232 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40236 \begin_inset space \space{}
40240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40247 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40248 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40249 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40252 \begin_layout Section
40256 \begin_layout Standard
40257 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40259 Document classes are described in section
40260 \begin_inset space ~
40264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40266 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40274 \begin_layout Standard
40278 \begin_inset space ~
40283 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
40288 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
40289 as a layout for a document class.
40290 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40292 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40301 \begin_layout Standard
40302 Some classes use special class options by default.
40303 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40307 and you can decide to use them or not.
40308 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40309 recommended you leave them untouched.
40314 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40315 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40320 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40322 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40328 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40329 \begin_inset Newline newline
40334 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40337 \begin_inset Newline newline
40340 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40341 distribution, see section
40346 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40348 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40360 \begin_layout Standard
40365 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40366 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
40367 in the background if the child document
40368 is opened without its master.
40369 This way child documents are always compilable.
40370 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40377 \begin_inset space ~
40385 \begin_layout Standard
40386 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40397 \begin_inset Index idx
40400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40402 -packages ! prettyref
40408 \begin_inset Index idx
40411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40413 -packages ! refstyle
40418 for cross-references, see section
40419 \begin_inset space ~
40423 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40425 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40432 \begin_layout Section
40436 \begin_layout Standard
40437 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40438 Please refer to the section
40441 \begin_inset space ~
40449 \begin_inset space ~
40454 manual for details.
40457 \begin_layout Section
40461 \begin_layout Standard
40462 Modules are explained in section
40463 \begin_inset space ~
40467 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40469 reference "subsec:Modules"
40476 \begin_layout Section
40480 \begin_layout Standard
40482 \begin_inset space ~
40486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40488 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
40495 \begin_layout Section
40499 \begin_layout Standard
40500 The document font settings are described in section
40501 \begin_inset space ~
40505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40507 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40514 \begin_layout Section
40518 \begin_layout Standard
40519 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40531 \begin_inset space ~
40536 and whether it should be a
40539 \begin_inset space ~
40544 can also be specified here.
40547 \begin_layout Standard
40548 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
40549 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
40550 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40552 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40555 \begin_layout Standard
40558 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
40561 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
40562 justifies the text on screen.
40563 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
40567 \begin_layout Section
40571 \begin_layout Standard
40572 This dialog is described in sections
40573 \begin_inset space ~
40577 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40579 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40586 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
40593 \begin_layout Section
40597 \begin_layout Standard
40598 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40599 \begin_inset space ~
40603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40605 reference "subsec:Margins"
40612 \begin_layout Section
40614 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40616 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40621 \begin_inset Index idx
40624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40625 Language ! Encoding
40633 \begin_layout Standard
40634 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40635 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
40636 (the \SpecialChar LyX
40638 is always encoded in utf8).
40639 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40640 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
40641 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40642 -command is not known for
40643 a particular character).
40646 \begin_layout Standard
40647 If you use the option
40652 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40653 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40654 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40656 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40657 exactly one encoding.
40658 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40661 \begin_layout Standard
40663 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40664 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40665 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40666 installation supports Unicode), choose
40667 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40668 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40669 is quite incomplete, so
40670 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40675 (when \SpecialChar LyX
40676 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40677 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
40678 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40679 -commands is not used, because all
40680 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40681 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40682 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40683 , two new alternative engines
40684 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40686 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40688 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40691 \begin_inset space ~
40699 \begin_inset space ~
40707 \begin_inset space ~
40713 \begin_inset space ~
40717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40719 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
40724 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40728 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40731 \begin_layout Standard
40735 \begin_inset space ~
40740 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40741 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40751 The possible settings are:
40754 \begin_layout Description
40755 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40757 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40758 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40762 \begin_inset space ~
40766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40768 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
40775 \begin_layout Description
40776 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40777 format you will use.
40778 In many cases this will be
40783 \begin_inset Index idx
40786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40794 If the newer package
40799 \begin_inset Index idx
40802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40804 -packages ! polyglossia
40809 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40810 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40811 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
40813 this package will be used instead of
40820 \begin_layout Description
40822 \begin_inset space ~
40833 would be more appropriate.
40836 \begin_layout Description
40837 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40838 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40842 (for German texts), type in
40845 \begin_inset Newline newline
40850 usepackage{ngerman}
40853 \begin_layout Description
40854 None will not use a language package.
40855 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40858 \begin_layout Standard
40859 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40862 \begin_layout Description
40864 \begin_inset space ~
40868 \begin_inset space ~
40872 \begin_inset space ~
40879 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40885 \begin_inset Index idx
40888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40890 -packages ! inputenc
40896 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40897 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40898 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
40902 \begin_layout Description
40903 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40905 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
40906 commands, which may result in a big
40907 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
40908 -commands are needed.
40911 \begin_layout Description
40913 \begin_inset space ~
40917 \begin_inset space ~
40920 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40923 \begin_layout Description
40925 \begin_inset space ~
40929 \begin_inset space ~
40932 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40935 \begin_layout Description
40937 \begin_inset space ~
40940 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40943 \begin_layout Description
40945 \begin_inset space ~
40949 \begin_inset space ~
40952 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40953 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
40956 \begin_layout Description
40958 \begin_inset space ~
40962 \begin_inset space ~
40965 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
40969 \begin_layout Description
40971 \begin_inset space ~
40975 \begin_inset space ~
40978 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
40979 ISO-8859-13 encoding
40982 \begin_layout Description
40984 \begin_inset space ~
40988 \begin_inset space ~
40992 \begin_inset space ~
40995 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
40996 \begin_inset space ~
41002 \begin_layout Description
41004 \begin_inset space ~
41008 \begin_inset space ~
41012 \begin_inset space ~
41015 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
41016 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
41019 \begin_layout Description
41021 \begin_inset space ~
41025 \begin_inset space ~
41028 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
41029 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
41030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41031 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41032 \begin_inset space ~
41036 \begin_inset space ~
41042 \begin_layout Description
41044 \begin_inset space ~
41048 \begin_inset space ~
41051 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
41052 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
41053 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41055 should try to use the encoding Unicode
41056 \begin_inset space ~
41060 \begin_inset space ~
41066 \begin_layout Description
41068 \begin_inset space ~
41072 \begin_inset space ~
41075 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
41078 \begin_layout Description
41080 \begin_inset space ~
41084 \begin_inset space ~
41087 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41090 \begin_layout Description
41092 \begin_inset space ~
41096 \begin_inset space ~
41099 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41102 \begin_layout Description
41104 \begin_inset space ~
41107 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41110 \begin_layout Description
41112 \begin_inset space ~
41115 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41118 \begin_layout Description
41120 \begin_inset space ~
41124 \begin_inset space ~
41127 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41130 \begin_layout Description
41132 \begin_inset space ~
41136 \begin_inset space ~
41142 \begin_layout Description
41144 \begin_inset space ~
41148 \begin_inset space ~
41151 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41154 \begin_layout Description
41156 \begin_inset space ~
41160 \begin_inset space ~
41166 \begin_layout Description
41168 \begin_inset space ~
41172 \begin_inset space ~
41175 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41181 \begin_inset Index idx
41184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41191 , when using this, set the document language to
41196 \begin_layout Description
41198 \begin_inset space ~
41202 \begin_inset space ~
41205 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41210 , when using this, set the document language to
41213 \begin_inset space ~
41219 \begin_layout Description
41221 \begin_inset space ~
41225 \begin_inset space ~
41228 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41234 \begin_inset Index idx
41237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41239 -packages ! japanese
41244 , when using this, set the document language to
41249 \begin_layout Description
41251 \begin_inset space ~
41255 \begin_inset space ~
41258 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41263 , when using this, set the document language to
41268 \begin_layout Description
41270 \begin_inset space ~
41274 \begin_inset space ~
41277 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41282 , when using this, set the document language to
41287 \begin_layout Description
41289 \begin_inset space ~
41292 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41295 \begin_layout Description
41297 \begin_inset space ~
41301 \begin_inset space ~
41305 \begin_inset space ~
41308 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41311 \begin_layout Description
41313 \begin_inset space ~
41317 \begin_inset space ~
41321 \begin_inset space ~
41324 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41325 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41326 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41329 \begin_layout Description
41331 \begin_inset space ~
41335 \begin_inset space ~
41341 \begin_layout Description
41343 \begin_inset space ~
41347 \begin_inset space ~
41350 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41351 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41354 \begin_layout Description
41356 \begin_inset space ~
41360 \begin_inset space ~
41363 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41369 \begin_inset Index idx
41372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41379 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41382 \begin_layout Description
41384 \begin_inset space ~
41392 \begin_inset space ~
41395 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41402 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41405 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41412 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41413 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41415 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41418 \begin_layout Description
41420 \begin_inset space ~
41424 \begin_inset space ~
41427 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41433 \begin_inset Index idx
41436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41443 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41446 \begin_layout Description
41448 \begin_inset space ~
41451 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41457 \begin_inset Index idx
41460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41462 -packages ! inputenc
41468 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41472 \begin_layout Description
41474 \begin_inset space ~
41478 \begin_inset space ~
41482 \begin_inset space ~
41485 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41486 \begin_inset space ~
41492 \begin_layout Description
41494 \begin_inset space ~
41498 \begin_inset space ~
41502 \begin_inset space ~
41505 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41506 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41507 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41511 \begin_layout Description
41513 \begin_inset space ~
41517 \begin_inset space ~
41521 \begin_inset space ~
41524 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41525 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41528 \begin_layout Section
41530 \begin_inset Index idx
41533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41540 \begin_inset Index idx
41543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41550 \begin_inset Index idx
41553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41554 Color ! Shaded boxes
41560 \begin_inset Index idx
41563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41564 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41572 \begin_layout Standard
41573 Here you can alter the font color for the
41577 (default: black), for
41580 \begin_inset space ~
41585 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41589 (default: white) and for
41592 \begin_inset space ~
41602 sets the color back to the default.
41605 \begin_layout Standard
41606 Clicking any button showing
41614 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41615 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41616 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41617 later more quickly.
41620 \begin_layout Standard
41621 Note, if you change the
41624 \begin_inset space ~
41629 font color and use the option
41632 \begin_inset space ~
41637 in the document settings under
41640 \begin_inset space ~
41645 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41646 \begin_inset space ~
41650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41652 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41659 \begin_layout Standard
41660 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41666 \begin_layout Standard
41670 \begin_inset space ~
41679 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41682 \begin_inset space ~
41685 Code after a forced page break:
41688 \begin_layout Itemize
41689 For the page color:
41690 \begin_inset Newline newline
41697 pagecolor{color name}
41700 \begin_layout Itemize
41701 For the text color:
41702 \begin_inset Newline newline
41712 \begin_layout Standard
41713 You are restricted to one of
41749 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
41756 \begin_inset space ~
41762 \begin_inset Newline newline
41765 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41766 names to refer to them:
41769 \begin_layout Itemize
41775 \begin_inset Newline newline
41780 page_backgroundcolor
41783 \begin_layout Itemize
41787 \begin_inset space ~
41793 \begin_inset Newline newline
41801 \begin_layout Itemize
41805 \begin_inset space ~
41811 \begin_inset Newline newline
41819 \begin_layout Itemize
41823 \begin_inset space ~
41829 \begin_inset Newline newline
41837 \begin_layout Standard
41838 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
41841 \begin_inset space ~
41849 \begin_inset space ~
41857 \begin_layout Section
41861 \begin_layout Standard
41862 Here you can adjust the
41866 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41870 as described in section
41871 \begin_inset space ~
41875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41877 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
41884 \begin_layout Section
41888 \begin_layout Standard
41889 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41895 \begin_inset Index idx
41898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41910 \begin_inset Index idx
41913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41915 -packages ! jurabib
41923 Sectioned bibliography
41925 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41931 \begin_inset Index idx
41934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41936 -packages ! bibtopic
41941 and you can select a
41945 for the generation of the bibliography.
41946 For a further description see section
41947 \begin_inset space ~
41951 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41953 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41960 \begin_layout Section
41964 \begin_layout Standard
41965 Here you can define the
41969 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
41971 \begin_inset space ~
41975 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41977 reference "sec:Index"
41984 \begin_layout Section
41988 \begin_layout Standard
41989 The PDF properties are explained in section
41990 \begin_inset space ~
41994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41996 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
42003 \begin_layout Section
42007 \begin_layout Standard
42008 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
42009 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42015 \begin_inset Index idx
42018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42020 -packages ! amsmath
42030 \begin_inset Index idx
42033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42035 -packages ! amssymb
42045 \begin_inset Index idx
42048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42060 \begin_inset Index idx
42063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42075 \begin_inset Index idx
42078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42080 -packages ! mathdots
42090 \begin_inset Index idx
42093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42095 -packages ! mathtools
42105 \begin_inset Index idx
42108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42120 \begin_inset Index idx
42123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42125 -packages ! stackrel
42135 \begin_inset Index idx
42138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42140 -packages ! stmaryrd
42150 \begin_inset Index idx
42153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42155 -packages ! undertilde
42160 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42163 \begin_layout Description
42164 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42165 -errors in formulas,
42166 ensure that you have this enabled.
42169 \begin_layout Description
42170 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42171 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42172 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
42176 \begin_layout Description
42177 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42180 \begin_inset space ~
42192 \begin_layout Description
42193 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42196 \begin_inset space ~
42208 \begin_layout Description
42209 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42220 \begin_layout Description
42221 mathtools is used for the math commands
42257 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
42264 \begin_layout Description
42265 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42267 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42276 \begin_layout Description
42277 stackrel is used for the math command
42294 \begin_layout Description
42295 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
42298 \begin_layout Description
42299 undertilde is used for the math command
42307 Accents for one Character
42316 \begin_layout Section
42320 \begin_layout Standard
42321 The float placement options are described in the section
42324 \begin_inset space ~
42332 \begin_inset space ~
42340 \begin_layout Section
42344 \begin_layout Standard
42345 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42347 Program Code Listings
42352 \begin_inset space ~
42360 \begin_layout Section
42364 \begin_layout Standard
42365 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42373 set to be used and set the
42378 The itemize environment is described in section
42379 \begin_inset space ~
42383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42385 reference "sec:Itemize"
42392 \begin_layout Standard
42393 You can furthermore specify a
42396 \begin_inset space ~
42401 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42402 command of the desired character.
42403 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42410 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42412 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42416 \begin_inset space \space{}
42420 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42430 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42431 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42434 \begin_layout Standard
42435 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42443 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42444 -packages in the preamble (menu
42447 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42448 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42451 \begin_inset space ~
42457 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42461 usepackage{textcomp}
42464 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42468 usepackage{amssymb}
42478 \begin_layout Section
42482 \begin_layout Standard
42483 Branches are described in section
42484 \begin_inset space ~
42488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42490 reference "sec:Branches"
42497 \begin_layout Section
42499 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42501 name "sec:Doc-Output"
42508 \begin_layout Standard
42509 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42512 \begin_layout Description
42514 \begin_inset space ~
42518 \begin_inset space ~
42521 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42541 View Master Document
42542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42549 Update Master Document
42550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42557 menu or the toolbar.
42558 The default is set in
42560 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42561 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42563 \begin_inset space ~
42566 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42570 \begin_inset space ~
42574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42576 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42583 \begin_layout Description
42585 \begin_inset space ~
42589 \begin_inset space ~
42592 Output settings for the menu
42594 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42596 \begin_inset space ~
42602 For a detailed description see section
42604 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42609 \begin_inset space ~
42617 \begin_layout Description
42619 \begin_inset space ~
42623 \begin_inset space ~
42626 Options offers settings for the export format
42634 \begin_inset space ~
42639 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42640 \begin_inset space ~
42643 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42647 \begin_inset space ~
42652 settings are described in detail in section
42654 Math Output in XHTML
42659 \begin_inset space ~
42668 \begin_inset space ~
42672 \begin_inset space ~
42677 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42680 \begin_layout Section
42688 \begin_layout Standard
42689 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42691 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
42693 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42695 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42699 \begin_layout Standard
42700 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42701 -syntax is given in section
42702 \begin_inset space ~
42706 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42708 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
42715 \begin_layout Chapter
42721 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42723 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42728 \begin_inset Index idx
42731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42740 \begin_layout Standard
42741 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42743 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42747 It has the following submenus.
42750 \begin_layout Section
42754 \begin_layout Subsection
42758 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42759 User Interface File
42760 \begin_inset Index idx
42763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42764 Customization ! of toolbars
42770 \begin_inset Index idx
42773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42774 Customization ! of menus
42782 \begin_layout Standard
42783 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42784 interface (ui) file.
42785 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42793 \begin_layout Description
42798 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42801 \begin_layout Description
42808 the menu entries in popup context menus
42811 \begin_layout Description
42816 specifies the toolbar buttons
42819 \begin_layout Standard
42820 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42821 and edit the entries.
42824 \begin_layout Standard
42825 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42837 entries must be finished with an explicit
42862 and in the case of the
42863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42875 The syntax for the entries is:
42878 \begin_layout Standard
42879 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42908 \begin_layout Standard
42910 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42913 All the \SpecialChar LyX
42914 -functions are listed in the menu
42916 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
42918 \begin_inset space ~
42926 \begin_layout Standard
42927 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42933 \begin_layout Standard
42934 For example, assuming you use the menu
42936 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42939 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42943 \begin_layout Standard
42944 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42968 \begin_layout Standard
42970 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42985 to have the sixth bookmark.
42988 \begin_layout Standard
42992 \begin_inset space ~
42997 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
42998 's toolbar buttons.
42999 The currently available icon sets are compared in
43000 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43003 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
43010 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43014 \begin_layout Standard
43017 Enable tool tips in main work area
43019 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
43023 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43027 \begin_layout Standard
43032 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
43033 should display in the menu
43035 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43037 \begin_inset space ~
43045 \begin_layout Subsection
43049 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43053 \begin_layout Standard
43056 Restore window layouts and geometries
43059 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
43060 the last \SpecialChar LyX
43064 \begin_layout Standard
43067 Restore cursor positions
43069 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
43073 \begin_layout Standard
43076 Load opened files from last session
43078 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
43082 \begin_layout Standard
43085 Clear all session information
43087 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
43088 sessions (cursor positions, names
43089 of last opened documents, etc.).
43092 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43094 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43096 name "subsec:Backup documents"
43101 \begin_inset Index idx
43104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43113 \begin_layout Standard
43116 Backup original documents when saving
43118 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43119 it was saved the last time.
43120 It is stored in the
43123 \begin_inset space ~
43129 \begin_inset space ~
43133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43135 reference "sec:Paths"
43139 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43142 \begin_inset space ~
43148 The backup file has the file extension
43149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43163 \begin_layout Standard
43166 Backup documents, every
43168 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
43171 \begin_layout Standard
43174 Save documents compressed by default
43176 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
43177 \begin_inset space ~
43181 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43183 reference "subsec:Compressed"
43188 This applies to newly created documents only.
43189 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
43192 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43193 Windows & work area
43196 \begin_layout Standard
43199 Open documents in tabs
43201 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
43205 \begin_layout Standard
43210 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
43215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43223 reference "sec:Paths"
43227 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
43234 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
43235 documents will be opened in the same running instance
43236 of \SpecialChar LyX
43238 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
43239 instance is created for each file.
43242 \begin_layout Standard
43245 Single close-tab button
43247 is checked, there will only be one close button (
43250 \begin_inset Graphics
43251 filename ../images/closetab.svgz
43259 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43260 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43263 \begin_layout Standard
43264 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43272 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
43273 before the change takes effect.
43281 \begin_layout Standard
43286 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
43288 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
43290 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43294 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
43295 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
43296 and only want to close the view in once instance.
43299 \begin_layout Subsection
43301 \begin_inset Index idx
43304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43311 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43313 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
43320 \begin_layout Standard
43321 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
43325 \begin_layout Standard
43326 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43334 This section only deals with the fonts
43338 the \SpecialChar LyX
43340 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43343 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43344 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43355 \begin_layout Standard
43356 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
43373 (depends on the system) as its
43376 \begin_inset space ~
43392 \begin_layout Standard
43393 You can change the font size with the
43400 \begin_layout Standard
43405 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43407 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43410 points have the size of 1
43411 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43415 \begin_inset space ~
43419 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43421 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43426 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43427 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43431 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43432 \begin_inset space ~
43436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43438 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
43445 \begin_layout Standard
43448 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43450 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
43451 needs to redraw the screen less often.
43452 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43453 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43454 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43456 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43457 \begin_inset space ~
43463 \begin_layout Subsection
43465 \begin_inset Index idx
43468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43469 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
43476 \begin_inset Index idx
43479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43488 \begin_layout Standard
43489 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
43490 by choosing an item in the
43491 list and selecting the
43498 \begin_layout Standard
43499 By checking the option
43503 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43506 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43507 \begin_inset space ~
43511 \begin_inset space ~
43516 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43519 \begin_layout Subsection
43521 \begin_inset Index idx
43524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43533 \begin_layout Standard
43534 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
43538 \begin_layout Standard
43543 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43544 This feature is described in section
43545 \begin_inset space ~
43549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43551 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43558 \begin_layout Standard
43559 Checking the option
43562 \begin_inset space ~
43566 \begin_inset space ~
43570 \begin_inset space ~
43575 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43578 \begin_layout Section
43580 \begin_inset Index idx
43583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43592 \begin_layout Subsection
43596 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43600 \begin_layout Standard
43603 Cursor follows scrollbar
43605 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43609 \begin_layout Standard
43610 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43611 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43612 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43615 \begin_layout Standard
43618 Scroll below end of document
43620 is self-explanatory.
43623 \begin_layout Standard
43624 In \SpecialChar LyX
43625 one can jump from word to word by pressing
43632 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43634 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43635 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43638 \begin_layout Standard
43641 Sort environments alphabetically
43643 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43646 \begin_layout Standard
43649 Group environments by their category
43651 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43654 \begin_layout Standard
43659 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43670 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43674 \begin_layout Standard
43675 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43680 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43681 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43685 \begin_layout Subsection
43687 \begin_inset Index idx
43690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43697 \begin_inset Index idx
43700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43701 Settings ! Shortcuts
43709 \begin_layout Standard
43714 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
43716 Several binding files are available, among them:
43719 \begin_layout Description
43720 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43723 \begin_layout Description
43724 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
43736 \begin_layout Description
43737 mac.bind a set of bindings for
43740 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43748 \begin_layout Standard
43749 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43754 , and binding files for special languages.
43755 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43756 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43760 \begin_inset space \space{}
43764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43772 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
43773 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
43774 will try to use the appropriate binding
43778 \begin_layout Standard
43779 Some binding files, like
43783 , only have a limited scope.
43784 When looking at the end of the file
43788 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43791 \begin_layout Standard
43795 \begin_inset space ~
43799 \begin_inset space ~
43804 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43805 in the selected key binding file.
43808 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43810 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43812 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
43817 \begin_inset Index idx
43820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43821 Key Bindings ! Editing
43829 \begin_layout Standard
43830 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
43831 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
43832 functions and the bound shortcuts.
43833 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
43836 Show key-bindings containing
43839 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
43840 Insert there for example as keyword
43841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43848 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
43849 functions that contain
43850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43858 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
43859 All \SpecialChar LyX
43860 functions are also listed in the file
43865 that you will find in the
43872 \begin_layout Standard
43873 For example, to add the shortcut
43881 , select the function and press the
43886 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43887 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43890 \begin_layout Standard
43891 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43892 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
43894 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
43895 function names as a semicolon separated list.
43897 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43902 \begin_layout Standard
43903 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43906 \begin_layout Standard
43907 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43909 The syntax of the entries is:
43912 \begin_layout Standard
43918 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43931 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43937 \begin_layout Subsection
43939 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43941 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
43946 \begin_inset Index idx
43949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43956 \begin_inset Index idx
43959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43960 Settings ! Keyboard Map
43968 \begin_layout Standard
43969 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
43970 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
43971 provides keyboard maps.
43972 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
43973 is a Romanian one, you can enable
43976 \begin_inset space ~
43980 \begin_inset space ~
43985 and select the keyboard map file named
43992 \begin_layout Standard
44001 keyboard map and, if you use the
44005 bindings, you can select the first and second with
44008 arg "keymap-primary"
44014 arg "keymap-secondary"
44017 respectively or toggle between them with
44020 arg "keymap-toggle"
44026 \begin_layout Standard
44027 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44035 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
44044 \begin_layout Standard
44045 You can also specify the mouse
44047 Wheel scrolling speed
44050 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
44054 \begin_layout Standard
44062 \begin_inset space ~
44066 \begin_inset space ~
44071 you can select a key for zooming.
44072 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
44075 \begin_layout Subsection
44079 \begin_layout Standard
44080 Input completion is described in section
44081 \begin_inset space ~
44085 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44087 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
44094 \begin_layout Section
44096 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44103 \begin_inset Index idx
44106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44113 \begin_inset Index idx
44116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44125 \begin_layout Standard
44126 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
44127 are normally determined during
44129 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
44132 \begin_layout Description
44134 \begin_inset space ~
44137 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
44138 's working directory.
44139 It is the default when you
44150 \begin_inset space ~
44158 \begin_layout Description
44160 \begin_inset space ~
44163 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44165 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44167 \begin_inset space ~
44171 \begin_inset space ~
44179 \begin_layout Description
44181 \begin_inset space ~
44184 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
44190 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44194 \begin_inset Newline newline
44198 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44210 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
44211 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
44219 \begin_layout Description
44221 \begin_inset space ~
44225 \begin_inset Index idx
44228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44234 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
44235 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
44236 \begin_inset space ~
44240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44242 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44250 will be used to save the backups.
44251 \begin_inset Newline newline
44254 Backup files have the ending
44255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44265 \begin_layout Description
44267 \begin_inset space ~
44270 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
44271 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
44273 \begin_inset Newline newline
44280 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44286 You can edit this file with the program
44295 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
44296 in its preferences under
44299 \begin_inset space ~
44305 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44310 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
44312 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44313 in your \SpecialChar LyX
44319 and \SpecialChar LyX
44320 need to be running the same time.
44321 \begin_inset Newline newline
44324 The pipe is also used for the
44329 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44335 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44340 \begin_inset Newline newline
44343 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
44344 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44345 \begin_inset Newline newline
44361 \begin_layout Description
44363 \begin_inset space ~
44366 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44369 \begin_layout Description
44371 \begin_inset space ~
44374 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44375 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44376 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44379 \begin_layout Description
44381 \begin_inset space ~
44384 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44390 You only need to specify it if you are using
44394 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44396 For \SpecialChar LyX
44401 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44405 \begin_layout Description
44407 \begin_inset space ~
44410 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44411 When \SpecialChar LyX
44412 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
44413 to find it on the system.
44414 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
44416 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44418 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44422 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44425 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44426 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44429 \begin_layout Description
44431 \begin_inset space ~
44434 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44435 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
44436 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
44437 code or in the document
44439 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44441 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44442 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44443 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44444 scanned for the input files.
44445 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44446 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
44448 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44449 compilation may fail for some documents.
44452 \begin_layout Section
44456 \begin_layout Standard
44457 Here you can insert your
44466 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44468 \begin_inset space ~
44472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44474 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44478 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44481 \begin_layout Section
44483 \begin_inset Index idx
44486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44487 Language ! Settings
44493 \begin_inset Index idx
44496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44497 Settings ! Language
44505 \begin_layout Subsection
44507 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44509 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
44516 \begin_layout Description
44518 \begin_inset space ~
44522 \begin_inset space ~
44525 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
44527 You can find its actual translation status here:
44528 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44530 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44537 \begin_layout Description
44539 \begin_inset space ~
44542 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
44543 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
44544 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44545 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44562 The most widespread language package is
44567 \begin_inset Index idx
44570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44577 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
44579 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44580 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44581 come with the alternative
44587 \begin_inset Index idx
44590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44592 -packages ! polyglossia
44597 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44598 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44604 The available selections are described in section
44605 \begin_inset space ~
44609 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44611 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44618 \begin_layout Description
44620 \begin_inset space ~
44623 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44624 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
44625 you can here specify the command to start the package.
44626 An example is the start command
44632 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44634 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
44638 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44653 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44658 \begin_layout Description
44660 \begin_inset space ~
44668 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44669 command toggles the package on and off.
44672 \begin_layout Description
44674 \begin_inset space ~
44678 \begin_inset space ~
44681 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44685 \begin_layout Description
44687 \begin_inset space ~
44691 \begin_inset space ~
44694 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
44698 \begin_layout Description
44700 \begin_inset space ~
44704 \begin_inset space ~
44707 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
44708 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
44709 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
44711 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
44718 \begin_layout Description
44720 \begin_inset space ~
44723 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
44725 When this option is not set, the
44728 \begin_inset space ~
44733 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44735 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
44738 \begin_inset space ~
44746 \begin_layout Description
44748 \begin_inset space ~
44754 \begin_inset space ~
44760 When it is not set, the
44763 \begin_inset space ~
44768 is set to the end of the document.
44771 \begin_layout Description
44773 \begin_inset space ~
44777 \begin_inset space ~
44780 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44781 language will be underlined in blue.
44784 \begin_layout Description
44786 \begin_inset space ~
44790 \begin_inset space ~
44793 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44794 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44797 \begin_layout Description
44799 \begin_inset space ~
44802 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44803 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44804 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44805 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44808 \begin_layout Subsection
44812 \begin_layout Standard
44813 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
44814 \begin_inset space ~
44818 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44820 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44827 \begin_layout Section
44831 \begin_layout Subsection
44835 \begin_layout Description
44837 \begin_inset space ~
44841 \begin_inset space ~
44844 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
44847 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44848 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
44850 \begin_inset space ~
44856 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
44859 \begin_layout Description
44861 \begin_inset space ~
44865 \begin_inset Index idx
44868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44875 \begin_inset Index idx
44878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44879 Settings ! Date format
44884 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
44885 \begin_inset Newline newline
44889 \begin_inset Flex URL
44892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44894 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
44900 \begin_inset Newline newline
44903 For example the format
44904 \begin_inset Newline newline
44908 \begin_inset Newline newline
44911 prints the date as day/month/year.
44914 \begin_layout Description
44916 \begin_inset space ~
44920 \begin_inset space ~
44923 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
44924 is allowed to overwrite on export.
44927 \begin_layout Description
44929 \begin_inset space ~
44932 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44934 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44936 \begin_inset space ~
44942 For a detailed description see section
44944 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44949 \begin_inset space ~
44957 \begin_layout Subsection
44963 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44965 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
44970 \begin_inset Index idx
44973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44974 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
44983 \begin_layout Description
44985 \begin_inset space ~
44993 \begin_inset space ~
44997 \begin_inset space ~
45000 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
45005 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
45026 are used for Cyrillic.
45027 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
45028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45040 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
45042 sets up in the background.
45043 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
45046 \begin_layout Description
45048 \begin_inset space ~
45052 \begin_inset space ~
45055 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
45060 value depends on your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45064 \begin_layout Description
45066 \begin_inset space ~
45070 \begin_inset space ~
45074 \begin_inset space ~
45078 \begin_inset space ~
45081 options They only have an effect when the program
45085 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
45088 \begin_layout Standard
45089 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
45090 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
45091 manuals of the applications.
45094 \begin_layout Description
45096 \begin_inset space ~
45099 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
45100 \begin_inset space ~
45104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45106 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
45113 \begin_layout Description
45115 \begin_inset space ~
45118 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
45119 \begin_inset space ~
45123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45125 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
45132 \begin_layout Description
45134 \begin_inset space ~
45137 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45138 \begin_inset space ~
45142 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45144 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
45151 \begin_layout Description
45157 \begin_inset space ~
45160 command Command for the program
45162 Check\SpecialChar TeX
45165 that is described in the section
45167 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
45172 Additional Features
45177 \begin_layout Standard
45178 There are additionally the following options:
45181 \begin_layout Description
45183 \begin_inset space ~
45187 \begin_inset space ~
45191 \begin_inset space ~
45195 \begin_inset space ~
45200 \begin_inset space ~
45203 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45204 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45221 to separate folders.
45222 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
45224 \begin_inset Index idx
45227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45234 \begin_inset Index idx
45237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45246 \begin_layout Description
45248 \begin_inset space ~
45252 \begin_inset space ~
45256 \begin_inset space ~
45260 \begin_inset space ~
45264 \begin_inset space ~
45268 \begin_inset space ~
45271 changes Removes all manually set
45277 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45278 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45280 \begin_inset space ~
45285 dialog when changing the document class.
45288 \begin_layout Section
45290 \begin_inset space ~
45294 \begin_inset Index idx
45297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45306 \begin_layout Subsection
45308 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45310 name "subsec:Converters"
45315 \begin_inset Index idx
45318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45327 \begin_layout Standard
45328 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45329 from one format to another.
45330 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45331 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45338 \begin_inset space ~
45343 field and press the
45348 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45352 \begin_inset space ~
45357 drop-down list, modify the
45361 field and press the
45368 \begin_layout Standard
45371 Converter File Cache
45377 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45379 Maximum Age (in days
45382 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45383 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45386 \begin_layout Standard
45387 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45388 definition, is described in the section
45399 \begin_layout Subsection
45401 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45403 name "sec:File-Formats"
45408 \begin_inset Index idx
45411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45418 \begin_inset Index idx
45421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45430 \begin_layout Standard
45431 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
45441 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45444 \begin_layout Standard
45445 You can also define the
45447 Default output format
45449 that is used when you use
45451 View, Update, View Master Document
45455 Update Master Document
45461 menu or the toolbar.
45464 \begin_layout Standard
45465 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45476 \begin_layout Standard
45477 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
45479 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45480 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45481 This is done by specifying a
45486 More about this is described in the section
45497 \begin_layout Chapter
45498 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45500 \begin_inset Index idx
45503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45510 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45512 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45519 \begin_layout Standard
45521 \begin_inset space ~
45525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45527 reference "tab:Units"
45531 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45532 and used in this documentation.
45535 \begin_layout Standard
45536 \begin_inset Float table
45542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45543 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45546 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45561 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45569 \begin_inset Tabular
45570 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
45571 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
45572 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45573 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45574 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45707 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45711 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45744 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45748 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45780 scaled point (65536
45781 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45785 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45818 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45822 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45855 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45859 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45863 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45896 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45900 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45932 % of original image width
45937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46214 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46218 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46248 \begin_layout Chapter
46250 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46252 name "chap:Credits"
46259 \begin_layout Standard
46260 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
46261 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
46264 \begin_layout Itemize
46267 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
46270 \begin_layout Itemize
46276 \begin_layout Itemize
46282 \begin_layout Itemize
46288 \begin_layout Itemize
46294 \begin_layout Itemize
46300 \begin_layout Itemize
46306 \begin_layout Itemize
46312 \begin_layout Itemize
46315 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
46318 \begin_layout Itemize
46324 \begin_layout Itemize
46330 \begin_layout Itemize
46336 \begin_layout Itemize
46342 \begin_layout Itemize
46348 \begin_layout Itemize
46354 \begin_layout Itemize
46360 \begin_layout Itemize
46366 \begin_layout Itemize
46367 The \SpecialChar LyX
46369 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46378 \begin_layout Standard
46379 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46382 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46389 \begin_layout Bibliography
46390 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46391 LatexCommand bibitem
46397 The \SpecialChar LyX
46399 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46402 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46407 \begin_inset Newline newline
46411 \begin_inset Flex URL
46414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46416 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46424 \begin_layout Bibliography
46425 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46426 LatexCommand bibitem
46427 key "latexcompanion"
46431 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46433 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46434 Companion Second Edition.
46437 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46440 \begin_layout Bibliography
46441 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46442 LatexCommand bibitem
46447 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46450 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46454 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46457 \begin_layout Bibliography
46458 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46459 LatexCommand bibitem
46467 : A Document Preparation System.
46470 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46473 \begin_layout Bibliography
46474 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46475 LatexCommand bibitem
46484 The \SpecialChar TeX
46488 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46491 \begin_layout Bibliography
46492 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46493 LatexCommand bibitem
46498 The \SpecialChar TeX
46500 \begin_inset Newline newline
46504 \begin_inset Flex URL
46507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46509 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46517 \begin_layout Bibliography
46518 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46519 LatexCommand bibitem
46524 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46526 \begin_inset Newline newline
46530 \begin_inset Flex URL
46533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46535 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
46543 \begin_layout Bibliography
46544 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46545 LatexCommand bibitem
46551 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46553 name "Documentation"
46554 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46560 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46564 \begin_inset Newline newline
46568 \begin_inset Flex URL
46571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46573 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46581 \begin_layout Bibliography
46582 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46583 LatexCommand bibitem
46589 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46591 name "Documentation"
46592 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46596 how to use the program
46598 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46602 \begin_inset Newline newline
46606 \begin_inset Flex URL
46609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46611 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46619 \begin_layout Bibliography
46620 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46621 LatexCommand bibitem
46627 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46629 name "Documentation"
46630 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
46639 \begin_inset Newline newline
46643 \begin_inset Flex URL
46646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46648 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
46656 \begin_layout Bibliography
46657 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46658 LatexCommand bibitem
46659 key "makeindex-man"
46664 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46667 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
46676 \begin_inset Newline newline
46680 \begin_inset Flex URL
46683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46685 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
46693 \begin_layout Bibliography
46694 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46695 LatexCommand bibitem
46701 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46703 name "Documentation"
46704 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
46713 \begin_inset Newline newline
46717 \begin_inset Flex URL
46720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46722 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
46730 \begin_layout Bibliography
46731 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46732 LatexCommand bibitem
46738 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46740 name "Documentation"
46741 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
46745 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
46747 \begin_inset Newline newline
46751 \begin_inset Flex URL
46754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46756 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
46764 \begin_layout Bibliography
46765 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46766 LatexCommand bibitem
46772 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46774 name "Documentation"
46775 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
46779 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46785 \begin_inset Index idx
46788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46790 -packages ! caption
46796 \begin_inset Newline newline
46800 \begin_inset Flex URL
46803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46805 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
46813 \begin_layout Bibliography
46814 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46815 LatexCommand bibitem
46821 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46823 name "Documentation"
46824 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
46828 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46834 \begin_inset Index idx
46837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46839 -packages ! enumitem
46845 \begin_inset Newline newline
46849 \begin_inset Flex URL
46852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46854 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
46862 \begin_layout Bibliography
46863 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46864 LatexCommand bibitem
46870 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46872 name "Documentation"
46873 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
46877 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46883 \begin_inset Index idx
46886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46888 -packages ! fancyhdr
46894 \begin_inset Newline newline
46898 \begin_inset Flex URL
46901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46903 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
46911 \begin_layout Bibliography
46912 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46913 LatexCommand bibitem
46919 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46921 name "Documentation"
46922 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
46926 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46932 \begin_inset Index idx
46935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46937 -packages ! hyperref
46943 \begin_inset Newline newline
46947 \begin_inset Flex URL
46950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46952 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
46960 \begin_layout Bibliography
46961 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46962 LatexCommand bibitem
46968 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46970 name "Documentation"
46971 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
46975 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46981 \begin_inset Index idx
46984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46986 -packages ! nomencl
46992 \begin_inset Newline newline
46996 \begin_inset Flex URL
46999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47001 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
47009 \begin_layout Bibliography
47010 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47011 LatexCommand bibitem
47017 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47019 name "Documentation"
47020 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
47024 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47030 \begin_inset Index idx
47033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47035 -packages ! prettyref
47041 \begin_inset Newline newline
47045 \begin_inset Flex URL
47048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47050 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
47058 \begin_layout Bibliography
47059 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47060 LatexCommand bibitem
47066 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47068 name "Documentation"
47069 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
47073 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47079 \begin_inset Index idx
47082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47084 -packages ! refstyle
47090 \begin_inset Newline newline
47094 \begin_inset Flex URL
47097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47099 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
47107 \begin_layout Bibliography
47108 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47109 LatexCommand bibitem
47115 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47118 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
47122 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47124 \begin_inset Newline newline
47128 \begin_inset Flex URL
47131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47133 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
47141 \begin_layout Bibliography
47142 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47143 LatexCommand bibitem
47149 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47152 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
47156 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47158 \begin_inset Newline newline
47162 \begin_inset Flex URL
47165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47167 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
47175 \begin_layout Bibliography
47176 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47177 LatexCommand bibitem
47183 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47186 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
47190 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47191 for Cyrillic languages:
47192 \begin_inset Newline newline
47196 \begin_inset Flex URL
47199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47201 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
47209 \begin_layout Bibliography
47210 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47211 LatexCommand bibitem
47217 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47220 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
47224 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47226 \begin_inset Newline newline
47230 \begin_inset Flex URL
47233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47235 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47243 \begin_layout Bibliography
47244 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47245 LatexCommand bibitem
47251 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47254 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47258 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47260 \begin_inset Newline newline
47264 \begin_inset Flex URL
47267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47269 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47277 \begin_layout Bibliography
47278 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47279 LatexCommand bibitem
47285 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47288 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47292 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47294 \begin_inset Newline newline
47298 \begin_inset Flex URL
47301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47303 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
47311 \begin_layout Bibliography
47312 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47313 LatexCommand bibitem
47319 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47322 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
47326 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47328 \begin_inset Newline newline
47332 \begin_inset Flex URL
47335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47337 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
47345 \begin_layout Bibliography
47346 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47347 LatexCommand bibitem
47353 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47356 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
47360 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47362 \begin_inset Newline newline
47366 \begin_inset Flex URL
47369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47371 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47379 \begin_layout Bibliography
47380 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47381 LatexCommand bibitem
47387 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47390 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
47394 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47396 \begin_inset Newline newline
47400 \begin_inset Flex URL
47403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47405 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
47413 \begin_layout Bibliography
47414 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47415 LatexCommand bibitem
47421 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47424 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
47428 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47430 \begin_inset Newline newline
47434 \begin_inset Flex URL
47437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47439 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47447 \begin_layout Bibliography
47448 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47449 LatexCommand bibitem
47455 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47458 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47462 about new features in
47468 \begin_inset Newline newline
47472 \begin_inset Flex URL
47475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47477 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47485 \begin_layout Standard
47486 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47520 \begin_inset Note Note
47523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47530 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47531 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47532 bibliography is the second one:
47540 \begin_layout Standard
47541 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47542 LatexCommand bibtex
47543 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47544 options "biblio/alphadin"
47551 \begin_layout Standard
47552 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47556 \begin_layout Standard
47557 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47558 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47564 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47565 LatexCommand printindex